Home

SIMATIC HMI ProTool V6.0 Service Pack 2 How to

1. ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 1 7 Date Time Usage The date and time details can be displayed and changed on the operating unit The following facilities are available for this e Date time display You can use the date time display for screens and logs This means that you can adjust the date and time on the operating unit or in tags You can use tags to assign start values for the date and time e Digital analog clock The digital analog clock is purely a display element This allows you to choose between digital and analog display e PLC jobs You can use PLC jobs 14 and 15 to set the date and time on the operating unit and PLC jobs 40 and 41 to download the date and time to the PLC e input output field Configure an input output field with a tag in a time or date format if a date time display is not available for your operating unit When an input field is used for the date and time the operator can enter the date and time on the operating unit Note The actual date and time format depends on which setting you have selected in your Windows system ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 17 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 1 8 Examples of how to create screens In this example we will show you how you insert a coolant pump
2. OF Xx E amp P File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help l x El lt No Fiter gt A E SIMATIC PC Station 3 SIMATIC ProTool Pro RT Press F1 to get Help Ui ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 3 4 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Starting ProTool in Windows Start ProTool directly under Windows Choose File gt New from the menu to open a dialog box in which you can select a STEP 7 project and create a ProTool project in it You then select the operating unit New Project v Component view w enne ne ProT ool Step 88 SIMATIC 400 Potos a BEE Ba Example of the New dialog box for integrating STEP 7 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Release 12 02 3 2 SIMATIC Manager Requirement ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 If you are not working with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMATIC Manager is available to you for your ProTool projects SIMATIC Manager As will be familiar to you from SIMATIC STEP 7 you can use SIMATIC Manager as a central point for managing your projects You save time since you can perform the following tasks without opening ProTool Compile and download ProTool projects Start ProTool RT Export and import blocks of text fo
3. a Procedure Elcreate a new tag with the following settings 7 300 or S7 400 Name Date and Time Tag Type DATE AND TIME Acquisition cycle s 0 5 Area DB DB 1 DBB 0 7 200 Name Date and Time Tag Type STRING Length 17 Acquisition cycle s 0 5 Area V VB 300 Tag General Limit values Functions Options Name Date and Time Variable PLE PLC_1 B Range DB DATE AND TIME DB fi Length Byte 4 nao fo Acquisition Cycle s Hompe oh BlEnients ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 50 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques CO poea OOOO Apply the settings by clicking OK Output field Date and Time H VECITa RIGGES eld Carei ka ks m i Date and Time Variable yl alesl gt ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 51 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Procedure 7 300 or S7 400 The text or graphic list of the PLC program in ASCII It can be imported into the program 126 READ_CLK 126 ReadTime_FC 126 TP_DB 126 WriteTime_FC Define the storage area on the PLC Data_Block TP_DB TITLE DB with Date and Time tags VERSION 1 0 BEGIN END _DATA_BLOCK Activate FC2 in OB1 CALL ReadTime_FC Activate in PLC program SFC1 READ_CLK FUNCTION ReadTime_FC VOID TITLE ReadTime VERSION 1 0 VAR_T
4. Password Level You configure a password list on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the illustrated button or by choosing Insert gt Password List from the menu Note You can enable the password list while you are configuring by using SHIFT and double click or from the Edit option of the shortcut menu In active mode you can drag and drop a column to the required position and set the column width during the configuration phase Operation at runtime At run time the operator has to confirm each input with Enter to ensure that it is applied Since not every operator is entitled to manage users and their passwords at will display of the password list at run time depends on the password level of the logged in operator An operator logged in at password level 2 will only see entries at this and a lower password level in the list and can only create the same Note If you want to make the password list available only to the administrator as a general rule for user management configure it on a separate screen protected by the administrator s password ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 225 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Functions to manage passwords 5 226 You can use a password to protect control elements such as input fields or function keys from unauthorized persons This prevents operator error
5. Assign the script TempConvert to the Value Change event by clicking the Add button The figure below shows the Functions tab together with the script mounted Tag HEI General Limit values Functions Options Archive Conversion Selected Functions for Event Change Value 1 x Rerameters Remove Up Down OK Cancel Apply Configure an output field in a screen Assign the output field the tag Var_2 M Show Functions Available For Selection Every time tag Var_1 changes the script is executed and the result written to tag Var_2 The current value is displayed in the output field ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 236 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 14 5 2 Example of a function Objective A value in Fahrenheit is read from the PLC using ProTool tag Var_1 The value is converted to Celsius by the script DegreesCelsius Fahrenheit and written to the internal ProTool tag Var_2 You can associate tag Var_2 with an output field and display it on a screen Creating the script Procedure First create in ProTool the tag Var_1 with connection to the PLC and select Read continuously on the Options tab Configure tag Var_2 without a connection to the PLC lt no PLC gt Call Scripts from the process window Select the General tab and then the Function option Enter the following script
6. Export import blocks of text of a certain editor or object You can start exporting importing text in the project window by means of the shortcut menu right click of the editors and objects Only those blocks of text can be exported or imported that belong to the selected editor or object A text import operation started from the shortcut menu can be undone Exporting different text types When exporting you can select the types of text you would like to export Text visible on the screen such as labeling names It is stored in the file called Labeling csv Info text such as Help text for screen objects and messages It is stored in the file called InfoTexts csv Message text event messages and alarm messages It is stored in the file called MessageTexts csv Other text message settings text lists It is stored in the file called OtherTexts csv The default setting is export of all text types 5 250 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques The classification of the text types is done in accordance with the requirements that have to be taken into account in translation For example the placeholders have to be preserved in message text and when text visible on the screen is translated it might be necessary to take the limited Importing text You can insert translated blocks of text in your project by choosing
7. Minimum value Point of time a value is written to the project More information You will find more information on running the simulation program in its online Help and in the ProTool Pro Runtime User s Guide ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 6 9 Testing projects Release 12 02 6 5 Uploading projects Constraint Usage Projects cannot be uploaded in the case of the TP 170A As a result of a download operation the executable project is normally downloaded to the operating unit If you want to use the original project data for developing the project further or for error analysis they must remain on the configuration device On Windows CE devices only with external storage medium you can store not only the compiled project but also the source code of the project so that subsequent retrieval uploading of the project from the operating unit is possible Advantage In this way you can later perform analyses and changes to an existing project even if the original programming device cannot be reached or the source file pdb for the project is no longer available on the configuration computer Requirements 6 10 e Sufficient storage space must be available on the operating unit e The storage location for the source file must have been set on the operating unit Different storage locations can be set for the project file and source
8. a script ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 15 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 190009 190010 190011 190011 190012 190100 190101 An attempt has been made to assign a value to a tag which is outside the value range permitted for this type E g a value of 260 entered for a byte tag or a value of 3 for a signless word tag The tag is described with values too often e g in a loop triggered by a script Values are lost because the maximum of 100 event have been stored in the buffer Possible causes The value entered could not be written to the configured PLC tag because it was either above or below the value range The input is rejected and the original value is reset Possible causes Connection to the PLC has been interrupted It is not possible to convert a value from a source format to a target format e g A value should be assigned to a counter which is outside the valid PLC dependent value range A tag of the type Integer should be assigned a value of the type String The area pointer is not updated because the configured address for this area pointer is not available Type 1 Event messages 2 Alarm messages 3 PLC acknowledgment 4 Operating unit acknowledgment 5 LED assignment 6 Trend request 7 Trend transfer 1 8 Trend transfer 2 No is the consecutive number displayed
9. 260003 The user has logged off from the system If the password level is 0 no user is logged on 270000 A tag is not displayed in the message because it attempts to access an invalid address in the PLC 270001 There is a unit dependent limit as to how many messages may be queued simultaneously in order to be displayed see GHB This limit has been exceeded The display no longer contains all the messages However all the messages are recorded in the message buffer 270002 Messages are displayed from an archive are displayed for which there is no data in the current project Placeholders are issued for the messages 270003 The service cannot be set up because too many devices was to set up this service A maximum of four devices can execute this action 280000 Connection is re established because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated Check the connection to the PLC Check that the PLC is switched on and online is activated Enter a known password in the password input field with corresponding level Modify the password level in the password input field enter a password with a sufficiently high level Check whether the data area for the tag exists in the PLC the configured address is correct or the value range for the tag is correct Delete older archive files if necessary Connect fewer operating units which want to use the service ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 Use
10. Requirements In order to be able to access values on the PLC directly at runtime the following requirements must be met e The connected PLC must be a SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7 e You must have configured Status Force on a screen Status Force Tag 6 12 The figure shows an example of Status Force on the operating unit feo rex a Example of Status Force with tags Status In the status value column you can read the current values of the displayed operands from the PLC Force In the force value column enter a value which will be written into the operand address ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Testing projects 6 7 Troubleshooting If error messages are issued in the course of working with your project such as when you are compiling or downloading your project you will learn here how you take remedial action 6 7 1 Error messages during compilation Possible messages While the ProTool compiler is compiling a project status messages on the progress of the compilation process are output to a window You can seek help with the different messages by positioning the mouse pointer in the corresponding message line and pressing F1 The following messages make a check of your project necessary e Notes It is possible that logical operations in the project are either not correct or do not exist Check the project for
11. You can print several chapters at once or just print single chapters ProTool offers you the facility of customizing printouts to suit your individual requirements e You can limit a printout to single chapters or single pages e You can set the order in which the chapters appear e You can decide which data you want to output within a chapter e You can set margins define your own headers and footers and embed your own graphic in the cover These definitions are stored in a report Frequently required reports have been defined in ProTool in advance But you can also create your own reports as you wish All reports are common to all projects Every time you want to print you choose the report with which you would like your output to conform ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Documenting and managing projects 7 2 Project management with integrated operation ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 If you are working with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 use SIMATIC Manager to manage your projects You can then copy move back up and restore your projects in the same way as you have been used to from SIMATIC STEP 7 For further information refer to the documentation on SIMATIC Manager Note ProTool s Project Manager is not available to you in the event of integrated operation ProTool data can no longer be viewed independently in this even
12. elsewhere 80002 A line is missing in the specified archive 80003 The copying process for archiving was not successful In this case it is advisable to check any subsequent system messages too 80006 Since archiving is not possible this In the case of databases causes a permanent loss of the check whether the functionality corresponding data source exists and start up the system again ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 5 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 80009 A copying action has been completed successfully Since the path was incorrectly entered in Configure the path for the ProTool this causes a permanent loss of respective archive again and the functionality restart the system when the full functionality is required Archive values are stored in a buffer If Archive less values the values are read to the buffer faster Or increase the recording than they can be physically written e g interval using a hard disk overloading may occur and recording is then stopped The overload status no longer applies Archiving resumes the recording of all values The same action was triggered twice in quick succession Since the process is already in operation the action is only carried out once ProTool issues error messages from within the Windows operating system These error messages are issued in the Windows system lang
13. Example you are sending a machine to Germany England and France You want all pieces of text to be displayed on the operating unit in the language of the countries concerned You supply a project to a multilingual country Example you are selling a machine to Switzerland You want the operator to be able to choose between German French and Italian on the operating unit In any case you should always attempt to create and test the project in one language first This language then acts as your reference language for the translations Note You can access the Set Language dialog box in two different ways by choosing Edit gt Languages gt Select or System gt Assign Language from the menu The option used below is always Edit gt Languages gt Select Configuring in foreign languages consists of the following specific work steps 1 2 Satisfy the necessary system requirements Define the configured languages choose Edit gt Language gt Select from the menu Select a language as the first editing language choose Edit gt Language gt Select from the menu Create and test the complete project in this language first before proceeding to translate all the pieces of text together later Set the font choose System gt Fonts from the menu Configure a language switch only if you want to offer several languages simultaneously on one operating unit ProTool V6 0 Servi
14. In this case no further individual messages are generated 290006 The threshold values configured for the tag have been violated by values entered 290007 There is a difference between the source and target structure of the recipe currently being processed The target structure contains an additional data record tag which is not available in the source structure The data record tag specified is assigned its start value 290008 There is a difference between the source and target structure of the recipe currently being processed The source structure contains an additional data record tag which is not available in the target structure and therefore cannot be assigned The value is rejected Observe the value range for the tag type Check the value range or type of the variable Check in the configuration that the tag addresses have been set up in the PLC Observe the value range for the tag type Check the value range or type of the variable Observe the configured or current threshold value of the tag Insert the specified data record tag in the source structure Remove the specified data record tag in the specified recipe from the project ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 290010 The storage location configured for the Check the path specification recipe is not permitted configured
15. ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Index Release 12 02 Scenario 3 Automated production process example Scheduler Screen editor Screen objects Page number Screen objects in ProTool Screen partitioning on the operating unit Screens Components of a screen Example Overview Select screen Script tags internal and ProTool tags 230 Security through password protection Selecting the display classes Service work Functions Set field grid Set screen partitioning on operating unit Set up user interface Set zoom factor Setting date and time on the TP 170A example Setting date time Setting fonts Setting the column width Setting the column width and order of screen objects Setting the column width of screen objects Setting the message procedure Setting the order Settings Settings for message classes Shared database Importing message text Showing and hiding objects Showing objects SIMATIC HMI device family SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library SIMATIC Manager SIMATIC Manger SIMATIC STEP 7 Starting ProTool integrated Simulating projects Slider controls Soft key 5 28 Special features with conversion functions Standard clock pulse Standard colors Start screen Starting ProTool Starting ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 State area State button Static graphics Static text Status tag Steps to creating a multilingual project STRING tags Storage Struct
16. has the function parameters Overwrite Set the data mailbox status to zero Check the connection to the PLC Reload the data record from the data medium or retain the current values Overwrite the data record or cancel the process Overwrite the file cancel the process ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 290040 A data record error with error code 1 Check that the data carrier has occurred which cannot be described the data record the data in more detail mailbox and if necessary The action was canceled the connection to the PLC It might be that the data mailbox has not Trigger the action again after been installed correctly on the PLC waiting a short period If the error occurs again please contact the Customer Support Specify the error code displayed 290041 A data record or file cannot be saved Delete files no longer because the data medium is full required 290042 An attempt was made to execute several Trigger the action again after recipe actions simultaneously waiting a short period The last action was not executed 290043 Confirmation request before storing data records 290044 The data store for the recipe has been destroyed and will be deleted 290050 Acknowledgement that the exportation of data records has started 290051 Acknowledgement that the exportation o
17. 0 to 16 If you wish to display tags with decimal places in an input output field the tags must have a suitable format The format differs as a function of the PLC you selected for example SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC WinAC SIMATIC 500 505 Decimal places with integer tags If you configure decimal places for integer tags you can also enter values with decimal places in input output fields for example and display them If the actual number of places exceeds the configured number of places the places that follow are truncated without being rounded up or down The table shows the interrelationship between the configured number of places the value displayed or entered on the operating unit and the actual value on the PLC Configured Value entered or displayed Value on the PLC decimal places on the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 89 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Special features when entering limit values for integer tags Limit values for tags are entered without a point The constant for the limit value is interpreted differently depending on whether or not you specify decimal places for the tag The number of specified decimal places determines how many places of the limit value are interpreted as decimal places The table shows an example Configured Specified limit value Actual limit value in ProTool decimal places
18. 5 2 4 Input fields for concealed password entry Purpose With the input field for passwords the operator can conceal passwords when they are entered on the operating unit The string you enter is displayed in the input field with placeholders The figure shows an example BRRERERER Usage The input field for passwords is particularly suitable for the following applications e You want specifically to log on in the start screen of your operating unit for example without calling a password protected function beforehand which will automatically open the login window e You want to log in on the TP 170A Tag linking You can configure a STRING type tag for the input field The operating unit writes the string you enter to the tag If you link the tag to the function Logon_User the operating unit deletes the tag contents as soon as it detects a valid password has been entered This means that unintentional evaluation or display of the password elsewhere is avoided Should you still require the password as a tag in order for example to evaluate the tag on the PLC configure for the Change Password event the global function Write Password_To_Tag This makes sure that the tag only contains the valid password and not input that could be faulty ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 27 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 5 Function keys Purpose
19. A HMI System Messages In this chapter This chapter contains a selection of important HMI system messages for Windows based systems The table indicates when the messages occur and how they or their cause can be cleared Not every message is relevant for each operating unit HMI system message parameters The HMI system messages may contain parameters which are not decoded for the user but which are relevant in respect of the cause of an error since they provide a reference to the source code of the runtime software These parameters are issued according to the text Error code Notice HMI system messages are issued in the language currently set on the operating unit Procedure in the case of internal errors Please proceed as follows in the case of all system messages related to internal errors Start up the operating unit again Download the configuration again Switch the operating unit off stop the PLC and then restart both If the error occurs again please contact the SIMATIC Customer Support Make reference to the specified error number and message tags The print job could not be started or was Check the printer settings terminated for an unknown reason and cable connections The printer is incorrectly configured If a fault occurs repeatedly Or There are no rights for a network contact the hotline printer available 10001 No printer has been installed or no Install a printer and or ma
20. A function key is a key on the operating unit for configuring a function assignment You can assign one or more functions to any function key in ProTool The functions are triggered as soon as the key on the operating unit is pressed The function key assignment may be locally or globally significant You can assign a password level to function keys in order to prevent operation by unauthorized persons Note Do not operate several function keys soft keys or buttons simultaneously Unintended actions might otherwise be initiated Global assignment Globally assigned function keys always trigger the same function irrespective of the current control situation You can the open a specific screen for example display queued messages or print the contents of the screen By using globally assigned function keys you cut your configuration effort considerably since you do not have to assign individual functions to global keys on every screen You assign function keys globally in the Screen Keys dialog box which you open by choosing System gt Screen Keys from the menu To do so click in the Screen Keys dialog box on the function key you require You can specify which function you have assigned to a specific key on labeling strips as required or you assign an informative icon to the function key Note By choosing System gt Screen Keys you can specify global settings for keys that apply to all screens The icons app
21. Edit gt Language gt Import or by using the shortcut menu of the editors and objects in the project window The individual blocks of text are automatically assigned to the objects in the project Note You can undo an import of alarm message text To view imported text in foreign languages set the editing language to the language concerned e f you did not specify a target language for the translation when you exported the text you must specify the language into which the text was translated when you import it e If this language is not available as a configured language in your project it is created automatically Constraint with importing importing text with Cyrillic Greek or Asian characters It will depend on the operating system of the configuration computer whether you can export or import text containing characters not in the Western character set such as Greek Cyrillic or Asian characters e Windows 2000 multilingual A requirement for export and import is that the system standard and the system character set is set on the configuration computer to the desired language Windows Start menu gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Regional Options gt input locale for the system Set default button With this setting you can export and import text with non Latin characters without any difficulty e Windows98 Windows NT Windows ME Non problematic export and import is possible only with a localized operat
22. P Juice orink oo n n Recipe and data record illustrated by analogy with a filing cabinet e Recipe Recipes correspond to the drawers of the filing cabinet shown for example Orange or Lemon The reference value fields tags belonging to the particular recipe are defined in each drawer You use the recipe to define the data structure in your ProTool project You cannot change this structure subsequently on the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 185 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 e Data record Data records correspond to the filing cards in the drawers of the cabinet Drink Juice and Nectar A data record contains the values for a recipe The operator edits data records on the operating unit for example creating saving and deleting data records The Import Export function gives the operator the additional option of using external applications to edit exported data records and then importing them back on the operating unit Example of a recipe An example of a recipe is the filling station of a fruit juice system The filling station is used to produce orange drink orange juice and orange nectar The mixing proportions for each of these are different The ingredients are always the same Let us assume that a recipe called Mixture is created containing the following data structure The designations 1 orange g flavor e
23. Read continuously at least during the test phase for the tags you want to use in the simulator ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Testing projects Data formats PLC specific data formats Since the simulator can only simulate the project in Offline mode in other words without a connection to the PLC the data formats are converted to internal ProTool Pro CS formats This means that PLC specific data formats cannot be implemented Date and time The simulator converts data formats for date and time such as DATE DATE AND TIME and TIME OF DAY for example to an internal format that contains both the time and the date If you only enter the time for a tag such as this for example the missing component such as the date can likewise be modified During the simulation of tags with time or date dependent format therefore enter the complete value with date and time as necessary Example of a simulation The example in the figure below shows you on the basis of a sine curve how the values of a tag are written to the project in accordance with the settings in the simulator The following settings have been performed in the simulator in this context Set value 0 MaxValue 5 MinValue 5 Write cycle 10 1s Cycle 100 1s m Period 100s Maximum value 5 teense Peneneenenen Initial value 0
24. You insert a file of the 1ib type or in ProTool library format in the Library directory Use the New option on the shortcut menu to create a new empty library Save a library under a different name and then edit it e Renaming or deleting a library Use the Windows functions in Explorer of the library e Deleting library objects or folders Use the shortcut menu of the library e Restructuring a library Edit the overview by dragging with the Windows functions Use New Folder on the shortcut menu to add a new folder To rename folders or library objects click twice or press F2 Note You cannot edit a write protected library Editing library objects You cannot edit library objects directly you can only edit them in a project Paste the object in question to a screen in your project edit it there and move it back to the associated library Delete the original object and give the one you have just added the same name as the old one ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 11 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 1 3 SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library Purpose Settings 5 12 There is also the SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library in addition to ProTool s own libraries You open this library by means of an icon button on the Screen Objects toolbar The SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library provides you with more options for the varying and realistic design of sc
25. archive and are displayed as ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 143 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 13 7 Resource consumption of messages ALARM_S messages ALARM_S messages are configured in SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMOTION SCOUT The data is then stored in a shared database imported during the process of compiling the ProTool project and finally downloaded to the operating unit That means that ALARM_S messages use up resources on the operating unit Economizing on storage space 5 144 There are basically two ways in which you can economize on storage space on the operating unit e The following applies to all message procedures the shorter the message text the less storage space will be required e To economize on storage space on the operating unit of Windows based systems you can also deselect the SFM check box in the Message Settings dialog box choose System gt Messages gt Settings from the menu Messages of this type will then not be transferred to the operating unit You will find more information in the topic called System limits This section contains information about the memory requirement of projects on the basis of which you can assess whether or not the memory of your operating unit is large enough for the intended project Note In SIMATIC STEP 7 there are restrictions regarding the number and size of tags that
26. dialog box System gt Messages gt Settings The messages are printed on a printer attached to the operating unit Archiving To archive message events create archives Message events are then written to the message buffer and also to an archive The message buffer is volatile an archive containing messages is permanent Archiving is configured separately for each message Class You configure archiving in the Archives dialog box Open the dialog box from the Message Settings window Filter You can set filter criteria for displaying messages e Inthe Message Settings dialog box System gt Messages gt Settings Select at Alarm messages whether the first or the last Active event should be displayed first e Inthe Message View Properties Dialog Box Set on the General tab what you want to have displayed Messages Message events Diagnostic buffer Message archive ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 117 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 6 System messages What are system messages System messages advise you of operating unit and PLC operating modes System messages can range from information to serious errors A distinction is made between system messages and HMI system messages e System messages Are issued by the PLC and cannot be configured in ProTool e HMI system messages Are issued by the HMI device suc
27. eee eeeeneeeeeeenteeeeeaes 4 9 Configuration notes for touch devices eceeeeeeeneeeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeeaas 4 10 Functions to provide support for service Work 2s eseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 19 4 11 Editing Projects 0 eecceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneaeeeseeaaeeeseenaees 4 11 1 Convertible projects cceceeeeeeeceeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeeeeeaaes 4 11 2 Key assignment when converting c cceceeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneees 4 11 3 Example of how to convert an MP 370 project eeeeeeteeeee 4 11 4 Copying objects Between projects and within a project 4 27 4 11 5 Replacing a project and project parts c cecceeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteees 4 11 6 Undoing and redoing actions ccceeceeceeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeenaees 4 11 7 Undoing the last action ioenu s ccctsciedeaes cedex tepeceesstsnaderapt Mev ticacexstaececnsee 4 11 8 Redoing the last aCtion serseri a 4 12 Retrieving project information sssesesssesssrresesrnesssnnesetnneenannaseennesnannaae 4 12 1 Display in Cross Reference WINGOW cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeteeeeeeseenaees 4 12 2 Display at Project Information eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaaes ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 v Contents Release 12 02 vi Configuration technique u i2e 2 cece ce cccceccnccenenc
28. file as the storage location and specify the path on the Settings tab For Size enter 300 entries At Behavior When Archive Full select Automatically Create Sequence Archive and enter 7 as the number in other words 8 archives will be created When these have all been filled the first one is then overwritten ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 180 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 11 5 2 Structure of an archive for messages Structure Here is an example of a file for messages Time_ms MsgProc StateAfter MsgClass MsgNumber Var1 Var8 Tim eString MsgText PLC 36341550590 27 1 1 3 110001 06 30 99 13 12 51 Change to Online mode 36341550682 87 1 1 3 140010 06 30 99 13 12 59 Connection established PLC_1 Station 2 Rack 0 Slot 2 36341550682 87 1 1 3 140001 2 06 30 99 13 12 59 User administrator logged in with level 9 36341550682 87 1 1 3 170003 PLC_1 5 06 30 99 13 12 59 Change to Online mode 36341601759 25 1 1 3 190011 06 30 99 14 26 32 Connection established PLC_1 Station 2 Rack 0 Slot 2 The following is entered in the various columns Time_ms Time stamp as decimal value Converted Msg_Proc Message procedure 0 unknown message procedure 1 system message 2 message bit procedure event messages 3 ALARM_S message nu
29. from the menu or choose Manage Multilingual Text gt Import or Export from the shortcut menu Perform language settings Choose Options gt Manage Multilingual Text gt Language or Delete Language from the menu or choose Manage Multilingual Text gt Language or Delete Language from the station shortcut menu Copy or move projects Choose Edit gt Copy or Cut from the menu or choose Copy or Cut from the station shortcut menu or click or 4 or drag and drop Archive and unarchive Choose File gt Archive or Unarchive menu SIMATIC STEP 7 projects including ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 3 7 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Release 12 02 3 4 Changing the PLC and applying tags General If you change the PLC for example when changing to the new model the tag connections are not lost Tag names up to 80 characters long ensure when tags are applied from SIMATIC STEP 7 that the symbol names are applied in full Changing the PLC The connection between a S7 CPU and a ProTool PLC might be lost This means that there is then no conenction between the STEP 7 symbols and ProTool tags either You will find more information about this in Restoring symbolic tag connections Applying tags from SIMATIC STEP 7 The tag names which you apply to the ProTool project from SIMATIC STEP 7 are formed from the last compo
30. in your graphics Efficient creation of graphics To create graphics as efficiently as possible take the following recommendations into consideration Use pixel graphics primarily in those cases where the size of the window is fixed as with icons for soft keys or buttons for example You should use vector graphics for graphics whose size has to be subsequently modified Always create your graphics with the same aspect ratio as the clicked and dragged field in ProTool In doing so it should be borne in mind that a graphic having a size of say 10 cm x 20 cm cannot be displayed faithfully from a pixel point of view in a field of 1 cm x 2 cm Information is lost in such a case Saving large graphics 5 96 If a large number of graphic elements are used in a configuration for example as a background image or in graphics lists there may be storage problems in the ollowing cases The reason is that the working memory is too small The following cases can occur While you are configuring you reach the limit of the working memory The following message appears Could not find the server application program the source file or the element When you are compiling you reach the limit of the working memory The following message appears Insufficient memory You open a sizable configuration on a computer that does not have sufficient memory The following message appears Could not open document If one of these cases occ
31. oo o emn 7 Note Limit values for tags are allowed only in DECIMAL ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 90 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 13 3 Address and type of a tag Dependence of tags on the PLC The address and the data type the data format of a tag depends on the PLC Note You will find information about the various PLCs at Start gt SIMATIC gt ProTool gt ProTool Information System in the topic Process communication Available PLCs SIMATIC S5 AS511 SIMATIC S5 DP SIMATIC S7 300 or 400 SIMATIC WinAC SIMATIC S7 200 SIMATIC 500 505 SIMATIC 500 505 DP SIMOTION OPC Client Server Allen Bradley DF1 Allen Bradley DH485 LG GLOFA GM MITSUBISHI FX MITSUBISHI Protocol 4 Modicon Modbus Telemecanique Uni Telway GE Fanuc SNP SNPX Omron Host Link ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 91 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 4 Creating text or graphic lists Purpose Usage Text list Graphic list 5 92 Text or graphics are often more meaningful than abstract values For example the pieces of text full and empty or two graphic symbols present the state of a tank more lucidly than the corresponding numerical values Which is why ProTool gives you the opportunity to configure text or graphic lists These text or graphic
32. prerequisites for operating the machine or process as 2 You can create a number of screens with display elements and controls for Example of screen creation switching between screen for example for the user interface with which the operator is subsequently faced on the operating unit 3 Process data entry and transfer In order to enter process data or set new values you configure input output fields for example This is also possible as a symbolic display 4 Report process states To acquire and log process and operating states on the operating unit or to archive them configure messages 5 Define communication areas A defined address area on the PLC for data interchange with the operating unit is addressed by means of an area pointer The number of area pointers available varies depending on the selected operating unit Note Disable the Cyclic operation option for the following CPUs of distributed systems in the PLC dialog box IM151 ET200 S CPU BM147 ET200 X CPU In this way you avoid possible communication problems ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 3 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 2 Components of a ProTool project What is displayed in the project window 4 4 When you open a new or an existing project the project window opens The project data of a ProTool project is stored in the form of ob
33. projects in SIMATIC STEP 7 Integrating projects Integrating projects in SIMATIC STEP 7 Internal script tags and ProTool tags 5 230 Invisible button Overview 5 34 eg agg ash K Key assignment Keyboard assignment Language dependence Keyboard on screen L Labeling function keys ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Index Release 12 02 Language dependence Keyboard assignment Languages Configurable Create multi lingual projects Export Import Standard screens System messages Languages for reference texts Languages in ProTool LED is flashing Libraries In ProTool overview Libraries in ProTool Linear scaling of tags List box Overview Local function key Logging messages Logout Making optimum use of graphics Managing projects Managing projects in stand alone operation Memory requirements Message archive Message areas Message areas for SIMATIC S5 example Message areas for SIMATIC S7 example Message bar Message bit procedure Message buffer Print in report Message classes Message event Acknowledged Active Cleared Message indicator Message number Message number procedure ALARM_S Message numbers Message procedure Message bit procedure Message number procedure Message properties Message tags Message text Message view Overview Message view for messages Message window Messages Ack
34. with networking Downloading stops and crashes Computer performance is Select a lower baud rate inadequate The transfer aborts and a message reporting a compatibility contention is issued Possible Cause Contention between the Synchronize the operating system of the operating versions of the used unit with the version of the configuration software configuration software and the you are using The files for updating the operating operating system of the unit will be found on the ProTool installation CD operating unit ROM in the Images directory ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6 14 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Testing projects Note You can perform an operating system update with the ProSave service application The procedure for updating a device operating system can be found in the ProSave documentation Downloading does not take place Connection to the operating unit cannot be established message in the system message window The standard communication driver is not entered in the Windows device manger Interrupt problems Various modules are using the same interrupt Other programs block the interface for example SIMATIC STEP 5 MPI DP Download does not work Check the physical connection between the configuration computer and the operating unit The operating unit must also be in Download mode Check the device status of
35. 02 data type Bit System TIMER Timer S5 Time Note The details fixed point hexadecimal etc refer to the representation of the CPU They have no bearing on the display options on the OP Tooltip If the mouse moves above a tag name in the project window a tooltip is displayed It shows you the following information about the tag e Type e PLC e Address e Symbolic link if integrated e Full tag name ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 70 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 1 Properties of tags Tag definition Section A To define a tag set the properties of the tag in the Tag dialog box The figure shows an example of the Tag dialog box for SIMATIC S7 integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 ALARM_S_DB ALARM_SQ_DB db1000 DB2 DBS DBEO Bildnummer PLC Steuerung_1 v Type BE wl DBTDOP_HH170 DBTDOP_MP270 DBTDOP_MP270 DBTDOP Acquisition Cycle s E DETDOP_MP270 Bildnummer Bildnummer Bildtyp Number of Elements Bildnummer Bildnummer D H Length Byte Bildnummer Feldnummer Bildnummer reserviert Bildnummer reserviert1 DBTDOP_MP370T DBTDOP_OP170 DBTDOP_PC670 DBTDOP_TP170color DBTDOP_TP170sw we DBTDOP_TP2 color FEIERABEND_DB Kurvenpuff_Cos_270 Kurvenpuff_Kehrw_Cos_270 Kurvenpuff_Kehrw_Sin_270 Kurvenpuff Kehny Tan 270 H A H E B 06 ial Tag
36. 2 A WinCC channel provides the message texts via an interface This text is issued via this message ProTool Pro RT has no influence on this texts 220001 The tag is not downloaded because the associated channel the unit does not support downloading the data type bool bit 220002 The tag is not downloaded because the associated channel the unit does not support downloading the data type byte 220003 The associated driver could not be uploaded It is possible that the driver is not installed 220004 Communication is terminated and no update is executed because the cable is not connected or is defect etc 220006 The connection is established to the specified PLC at the specified interface 220007 The connection to the specified PLC at the specified interface is disconnected 220008 The PLC driver cannot access the specified interface or open it It is possible that another application is using this interface or an interface is used which is not available on the target device There is no communication with the PLC Check the parameter types in the PLC job Compile the configuration again Change the configuration Change the configuration Install the driver by re installing ProTool Pro RT Check the connection Check that the cable is plugged in the PLC is OK the correct interface is used the configuration is OK interface parameters protocol settings PLC address Reboot
37. 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 189 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 12 2 Recipe view Purpose Usage You want to be able to work straightforwardly and quickly with recipes and data records with minimal configuration The recipe view is a compact screen object which enables you to handle recipes and data records quickly and straightforwardly with minimal configuration This method is particularly recommended for data records with relatively few entries which are suitable for editing in tabular form You configure a recipe view on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the button shown Note You can enable the recipe view by using SHIFT and double click or from the Edit option of the shortcut menu This means that you can move a column to the required position and set the column width during the configuration phase Using a recipe view 5 190 ProTool provides the following buttons for using the recipe view at run time You can set individually for each of these buttons whether it will be displayed on the operating unit Create New Data Record The operator uses this button to create a new data record on the operating unit The specified values are assigned the default values specified as initial values for the tags concerned in ProTool Save Data Record The operator uses this button to save the current values of the data record l
38. 3 Notes on the configuration COMPULED ccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeettteeeeeenteeeees 3 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 ccecsseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 1 How to start ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 eseese 33 3 2 SIMATIC Maja goienera a T T 3 6 3 3 Working with SIMATIC Manager ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 37 3 4 Changing the PLC and applying tags cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeenaees 3 8 3 5 How to integrate and copy STEP 7 projects 3 9 3 6 Connectingte STEP 7 Lite se stccsceusecccecveast cdervenscaevest cadaadineteastlececansnads 3 10 3 7 How to restore the symbolic tag CONNECTIONS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 4 Creating and editing projects ssssssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 1 Fundamental considerations when creating a project 4 2 4 2 Components of a ProTool project c ccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeteees 4 3 Objects in the project WINDOW ee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeetaeeeseeaeeeetenaeeeeeeaes 4 5 4 4 Steps to be taken when creating a Project eee eeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 4 6 4 5 Configuring behavior at run time 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaeeeteenaees 4 7 4 6 PLC CWiVOIS 022 cc eceeccececeeeeeeeeceneeeeeceneeeeeneneeeeesaneeseenenseseeneneeeeatenaeeeeneaas 4 9 4 7 Area pointers 20 eee ee eececeece cece ee eeeeceeeeceeeeeeececaeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaaeeeeeeeseteees 4 11 4 8 Screen partitioning on the operating UNit
39. 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 3 Objects in the project window Overview Objects in the Project Window default CS pe o Be ee po o e pe po e p p Scheduler ALARM_1 Multiplex tag MUXVAR_1 Aa w ome ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 5 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 4 Steps to be taken when creating a project Principle To create a project perform the following steps 1 6 the Create a new project File gt New or File gt Open Choose File gt New to create a new project The project assistant guides you through a number of selection dialogs Select your PLC Select a driver for your PLC Only those drivers with which the selected operating unit can be run are displayed Enter information about the project in the summary should you wish to Click the Create button to open the project window Set the communication areas project window Area pointers Shared communication areas area pointers have to be set for certain functions such as bit message procedure and synchronous data record transfer to be used Create your project This involves the most work You can approach it in one of two ways Either you create all the individual parts first and then link them to form a meaningful structure the bottom gt up approach or you begin by desig
40. ALARM_S messages Acknowledging messages Acquisition cycle Address multiplexing Addresses Addresses of tag ALARM_S Acknowledgement Communication process Display classes Print messages Update ALARM_S messages 9 133 Analog clock 5 47 Analog display 5 44 Applying tags in SIMA 3 8 Archive 5 184 5 1 8 5 184 9 180 Display archive data Display archive data example Messages example Settings Archive messages Archiving Archiving process data Archiving tags Area pointers Data mailbox Array Array tags Asian languages Asian projects Assigning icons function keys Assigning icons to local function keys Assigning operator permissions Available PLC drivers B Bar graph Overview Bit trigger Button Buttons Buttons as direct keys Cc Changing the dynamic position of screen objects Changing the operating mode with a current display example 5 168 Changing the PLC in SIMATIC STEP 7 Clipboard Copy Clock Clock trigger Color category Color presentation Colors Colors of screen objects Columns of a message view Combining multiple functions Communication areas for messages 5 129 Communication sequence in the event of ALARM_S messages Compatibility Compatibility of recipes Compilation Complete devices Components of a project Components of a ProTool project Configuration Configuration at run time Configuration computer Configuration notes for touch device 4 17 C
41. CPU C7 634 OP 17 with integrated S7 CPU 4 x 26 ZEICHEH i RS mm SCHRIFTHGHE F2 F Example OP 7 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 1 9 Introducing ProTool Release 12 02 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 1 10 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Getting started in ProTool 2 Getting started in ProTool Here you learn how to start ProTool configure Windows based systems and what you should look out for while you are configuring ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 2 1 Getting started in ProTool Release 12 02 2 1 Starting ProTool Starting ProTool After ProTool has been installed you will find a folder on the Start menu called Simatic containing the following icons ProTool CS V6 0 Calls online Help Starts the configuration software Shows late breaking information on the configuration software me LS D Starts Setup in order say to change the ProTool language or to add a component ProTool RT V6 0 Copies the compiled project file in compressed form Starts the runtime software Shows late breaking information on the runtime software Starts the simulation software Starts the loader ProSave 6 0 Ta Opens ProSave as a stand alone application ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure
42. Create Sequence Archive A new archive is created automatically The archives receive the specified archive name with an additional number 1 n You can configure the number of archives Once the last archive has been filled the first archive is filled again e Output System Message When If the archive a floppy disk for example is full a system message is issued You can specify the level at which the message is to be output as a percentage e Trigger Function If the archive is full functions are triggered which allow special sequential archive handling ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 177 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 11 3 Displaying archive data in a specified time window Principle You can display archive data in other words tags and messages on the operating unit in the form of trends for tags or a message display for messages If you want to quickly and easily display archive data within a particular time slot you can enter the required date and time in an input field e Inthe message view the selected messages are displayed over a range before and after the set point of time e Ina trend display create a time slot by means of a trend display on the screen and display the archived trend data up to the set point of time The following figure shows an example of a trend display 2506 99 11 30 00 Time window in
43. For this the fud or fwd file created during compilation on an Asian Windows system has to be available in the same directory as the pdb project file The pdb project file can only be opened before the download operation but not modified any more Note Many projects are multilingual and use for example English in addition to an Asian language In such cases you can first create and test your project on a non Asian Windows system Not until it is completed do you change to an Asian system on which you configure and compile the Asian text and perform the download operation You can work most efficiently if you have both an Asian and a non Asian Windows system installed on your computer or if you work on a network with different computers for the languages concerned ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 15 9 Constraints on projects in Asian languages Supported languages Chinese PRC Chinese Taiwan Korean and Japanese are the languages currently supported Configuration memory Use different character sets as sparingly as possible in a project Every character set you use reduces the amount of memory available for projects 64 kB of configuration memory are available per character set which approximates to 1900 different Chinese characters for example If you configure more different Chinese chara
44. Light emitting diodes on the operating unit Purpose The light emitting diodes LEDs on the function keys of the operator panel can be driven on the PLC By means of a light emitting or flashing LED you can indicate to the operator that for example the device is expecting a certain function key to be operated Requirements For the PLC to be able to drive the LEDs you have to create the LED assignment data area on the PLC and specify it in your project in your project window at Area pointers Set the assignment of the individual LEDs to the bits in the LED assignment when you configure the function keys You will find a description of the LED assignment and the LED functions for the different operating units in the Communication User s Manual ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 218 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 13 7 Tab order Tab order To make it possible for a keyboard device without a mouse to access and operate each operated screen object such as a trend display or output field the operated screen objects can be accessed with the Tab key You can see which screen object has been made active because it may be highlighted with a color or surrounded by a border The expression Tab order means the order in which the operated screen objects are made active when the Tab key is pressed Configured tab order Usually the tab order is s
45. Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 64 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques ei Procedure 7 200 Enter the CPU system time in the memory area of the area pointer by initiating SBR2 Set_Time SUBROUTINE_BLOCK Set_Time SBR2 BEGIN NETWORK 1 II Set TP 170A clock for messages Ilon the TP 170A gt Date Time area pointer VB400 length 6 data words TODR VB214 read Date Time BMB VB214 VB400 6 and load area pointer on TP 170A MOVB 0 VB406 byte n 6 amp n 7 gt MOVB MOVB 1 VB407 Byte n 6 amp n 7 gt reserved END_SUBROUTINE_BLOCK The system time of the operating unit will be synchronized at run time with the system time of the PLC without the user having to trigger it ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 65 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 19 4 How to configure the date and time for xP170B Procedure The Date Time screen object is available for xP170B devices and higher With it you can directly access the system time of the HMI device C poea OOOO S Insert the Date Time screen object and perform the following settings Time Yes Date Yes Editing allowed Yes System time Yes Date Time E Lona Bete komat Iransparent Apply the settings by clicking OK ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 66 6AV6594 1MA
46. Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 229 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Notes on using functions e Do not program any scripts that already exist as ProTool functions e Ifyou want to use a function of the Set Bit In Tag type ina script note that the bit count direction always runs from right gt left and starts at 0 regardless of the PLC used 5 14 2 Internal script tags and ProTool tags Tags in scripts Tags are placeholders that occupy storage space on the operating unit and to which values can be written or from which they can be read during the processing of a script There are two types of tag e ProTool tags ProTool tags appear red in the script When a ProTool tag is used in a script the tag must have already been created in ProTool Otherwise an error message appears at compilation e Internal script tags Internal script tags have to be defined with the DIM statement and apply only in the VBScript procedure ProTool supports the following data types for tags Format eee OOOO O ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 230 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 14 3 Debugging scripts in ProTool Syntax check When you click the Compile button the script is examined for syntax errors Since the VB debugging tool is not available in ProTool we recommend that you test complex scripts directly in Visu
47. Possible causes Impermissible characters write protected data medium full or does not exist 290011 The data record specified by the number Check the source for the does not exist number constant or variable value 290012 The recipe specified by the number does Check the source for the not exist number constant or variable value 290013 An attempt was made to save a data Remedy record under a data record number Check the source for the which already exists number constant or variable The process is not executed value Delete the data record beforehand Change the function parameter Overwrite 290014 The file specified to be imported could Check that not be found Check the file name Ensure that the file is in the specified directory 290020 Acknowledgement that downloading of data records from operating unit to PLC has started 290021 Acknowledgement that downloading of data records from operating unit to PLC has been completed without any errors 290022 Acknowledgement that downloading of Check the configuration data records from operating unit to PLC _ have the tag addresses has been terminated due to an error been set up in the PLC does the recipe number exist does the data record number exist has the function parameters Overwrite 290023 Acknowledgement that downloading of data records from the PLC to the operating unit has started
48. Retrieving project information Tools The following tools are available to you for displaying or storing information on a project e Cross references e Project information 4 12 1 Display in Cross Reference window Usage When you have to add to or modify a project and need to check where and how a particular object is being used in your project you open the Cross Reference window You select an object in this window and all the references to this object in the project are then displayed to you Cross reference Quick_TP37 pdb Iof x Z_BOTTL_STAT Input Output fields OBJECT _31 as tag OBJECT 22 as tag Example from a project You open the Cross Reference window by choosing the View gt Cross Reference option from the menu The active object is displayed with a red border around it The selected object is at the uppermost level and all the objects in which the selected object is used appear under it The cross reference list also contains objects in the current Undo history undo and restore actions The status of these objects is shown in brackets after each object for example PIC_5 deleted Note You can use the Cross Reference window efficiently for troubleshooting ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 36 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 12 2 Display at Project Information Usage To
49. TP 170A e How to set the date and time on the TP 170A e How to synchronize the date and time with the PLC Configuration of the date and time requires programming experience with programmable logic controllers You will find information about this topic in the documentation for the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 2 19 1 How to display the date and time on the TP 170A Procedure To display the date and time on the TP 170A configure a date time tag for an output field The tag has to be supplied with the system time on the PLC Note The example applies to a connection for a S7 300 or S7 400 The differences from a S7 200 connection are pointed out The figures show the settings for a connection to a S7 300 or S7 400 C poea OOOO S 1 i3 Insert an output field and perform the following settings S7 300 or S7 400 Display Date and time S7 200 Display String Field length 17 Output field General Font Color Position Name Display Date and Time z Display I Transparent Decimal Places on T 30 V Border V Adjust Value lt No Tag gt ad Alignment Left Top Center C Center C Bight Bottom cot o eld Length ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 49 Configuration techniques Release 12 02
50. User Interface dialog box or on the toolbar Screens are stored under a symbolic name You enter a name by choosing Edit gt Properties from the menu This name has to be specified when you edit reference or delete the screen In addition screens are numbered automatically Start screen Declare one screen in every project as the start screen The start screen is the screen that is displayed after the operating unit has started up Fixed window The fixed window is the window that is always flush with the top border of the operating unit screen By choosing System gt Screen Keys from the menu you can open and close the fixed window and adjust its height by dragging with the mouse Since the contents of the fixed window do not depend on the current screen you can output important process tags or the date and time to it for example You configure the contents of the fixed window in the screen editor To access the fixed window click it with the mouse Soft keys buttons Soft keys are function keys with screen dependent assignment Buttons are virtual keys on the operating unit screen You can configure both soft keys and buttons for specific screens When configuring you assign functions to these controls You can illustrate the task of a control by means of a graphic or text You can use soft keys and buttons to open another screen turn a motor on and off or display the message buffer for example ProTool V6 0 Ser
51. Windows based systems 2 2 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Getting started in ProTool 2 2 Configuring Windows based systems Getting Started If you are not all that familiar with the ProTool visualization software we would recommend you read the short guide and get started with ProTool with the help of the example The printed version is enclosed with the manual Requirements for working with the brief introduction To do the exercises for ProTool CS in this brief introduction you require e aPC as a configuration computer e the ProTool software package ProTool incorporates the ProTool CS configuration software and the ProTool Pro RT Runtime software e an operating unit such as a SIMATIC Panel PC Other documents on ProTool CS You will find the electronic manuals on the ProTool CD at Docs UsersManual_ Win pdf You can find all the information contained in the manual in ProTool s online Help ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 2 3 Getting started in ProTool Release 12 02 2 3 Notes on the configuration computer Notes on the configuration computer So that you can work as efficiently as possible when you are configuring give due consideration to the following notes for your configuration computer 2 4 Close applications Close all other programs In this way more main memory will be available for ProTool Configurations on a local drive Do
52. Windows based systems 5 118 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques S7 components and DP standard slaves can provide diagnostic information when a system error occurs With its Report System Error function SIMATIC STEP 7 features a user friendly option to display this information in the form of messages These system error messages can also be displayed on an operating unit by means of the ALARM_S message procedure Note The 0 setting means the display is static The message window is not closed until the operator presses ESC Displaying HMI system messages with message view You can output HMI system messages and SIMATIC SIMOTION diagnostic messages to the operating unit using the Message View screen object Displaying HMI system messages on the TP 170A Bear the following in mind for displaying HMI system messages on the TP 170A e If necessary increase the default setting for the duration of display with regard to system messages at System gt Messages gt System Messages e Onscreens in which HMI system messages are important configure a single message view ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 119 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 7 Logging messages Enabling and disabling message logging To log message events on the printer select the Print check box in the Attributes Message dialog box in the m
53. a stable idle condition Motor OFF for example When a state changes Motor ON in our example it changes to ON state and remains in that state until there is another change of state One state type 5 32 For a state area with just one state you can set a range of values in which the state area is displayed or hidden In conjunction with a tag representing the fill level of a tank for example you can configure the display of a warning ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Two states type You use a two states type state area to display the status of a unit of equipment on the operating unit Tag connection For the two state type state button you can configure a tag which represents the current state of the state area and can also change it If you wish you can define a value for the configured tag that represents the ON state not for BOOL type tags The table shows which state the state area assumes as a function of the tag Value Value BOOL tag type integer tag TRUE 1 Configured value n FALSE 0 Each of n different values When linked to an integer tag the state area shows the ON state only if the tag accepts the configured value n With any other value the OFF state is displayed e Text graphic display For the two states ON and OFF you can configure different blocks of text
54. actions Purpose Principle During configuration it may become necessary to cancel actions which have been performed or to reconstruct actions which have been discarded The two commands Undo and Redo on the Edit menu are used for this purpose e Undo The Undo command key combination Ctrl Z cancels the last action performed If you keep selecting the command you can cancel up to 30 successive modifications e Redo The Redo command key combination CTRL Y revokes the last action canceled thus restoring the status before the last Undo command was executed Each active editor project window screen editor drivers has its own undo history Thus for example if three screens are opened at the same time three separate Undo Histories will be created When a screen is closed the actions listed in the accompanying History are deleted When the project is saved all the Undo Histories for the current project are deleted The last recorded action is displayed in abbreviated form in the menu The tooltips contain detailed texts for the Undo and Redo buttons and for the status bar Example of menu Undo VAR_5 edited Ctrl Z Redo PIC_2 edited CTRL Y Example of tooltip status bar Undo property edited of tag VAR_5 Redo contents edited of screen PIC_2 Until the corresponding undo history is deleted deleted objects in the cross reference continue to be listed as used objects The status of these objects is s
55. and cannot be modified at run time on the operating unit Use static display elements for example for system screens or for textual or graphic explanations for controls and dynamic display elements Static display elements are Static text Vector graphics Graphics Dynamic display elements Dynamic display elements can be linked to the PLC by means of tags They visualize current values from the PLC in alphanumeric or graphic form Dynamic display elements can change their display spontaneously at run time on the operating unit without the operator intervening Use dynamic display elements for all tasks associated with monitoring the process a machine or the system Dynamic display elements are Output fields State area Bar graphs Trend view Date time display Digital analog clock Analog display Objects from the SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Controls in ProTool The following controls are available in ProToo e Input fields e Function keys e Buttons e State buttons e Switches e Slider controls Dynamic attributes can be used to indicate for example by means of a change of color or by flashing that an operator input is expected at the control in a certain situation In addition you can display and hide control elements controlled by an event on t
56. and every 8 hours thereafter eal Procedure Double click Reports in the project window A new report opens You can leave the default settings for the paper format and layout as they are Al Click on this symbol and use the mouse to open a text field on the current page Type the title Message buffer from in the box Click on this symbol and open up next to the text box a further box in which to display date and time 5 Confirm the Date Time dialog box by clicking OK NJ Click on this symbol in order to put a line in the title and draw the line to the required length below the title The Line dialog box opens Go to the Colors tab and set black as the foreground color and confirm by clicking OK Click this symbol to insert the message view for the message buffer and drag the space required for outputting the message buffer below the line you inserted The Message Printout dialog box opens At first all the check boxes on the Messages tabs are selected ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 109 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 110 On the Messages tab deselect all messages except the system messages type on the Columns tab deselect the elements not required for the output line for example Diagnostic capability and confirm by clicking OK You cannot paste anything else in a report page once you hav
57. are placed in a database shared by ProTool During the process of compiling the project ProTool automatically imports the necessary data and subsequently downloads it to the operating unit Shared Database Configuring and downloading ALARM_S messages It is therefore important that the shared database is always up to date during the compilation process and that data synchronization is active ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 141 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 13 6 Updating the operating unit Principle The S7 CPU only stores information about pending messages which means that once all events arrival departure acknowledgement have occurred the message is deleted from the S7 CPU A network operating unit which lost its connection to the S7 CPU can log on to the S7 CPU again and get an update on currently pending messages When obtaining an update therefore the operating unit processes any missing events automatically if a message is not known to the S7 CPU but the arrival and acknowledgement events are not entered on the operating unit The events are entered and labeled in the message buffer on the operating unit Example 1 Standard situation Entries for a message in the message buffer Time Text No Time Date Status Text 14 28 08 27 03 99 K Boiler 13 Temperature 190 degrees Notify shift supervisor 14 31 12 2
58. based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Getting started in ProTool Environment tag TEMP In Windows a temporary file is created for files when they are opened and processed You decide where this temporary file is stored by means of the TEMP environment tag The path of the TEMP environment tag is normally set in the autoexec bat file If the TEMP environment tag is not placed in the autoexec bat system file the temporary file is stored in the local Windows directory If an error message is issued by ProTool that indicates an error upon write access the storage space on the drive might be too small for the temporary file In Windows 2000 the environment variable TEMP is set at Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System gt Advanced tab gt Environment variables button In Win NT 4 0 you set it at Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System Environment tab ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 2 5 Getting started in ProTool Release 12 02 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 3 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Requirements If the PLC you are using is a SIMATIC PLC and you have installed STEP 7 configuration software on your system you can integrate ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 Advanta
59. behavior of the Change Mode function so that the mode changes to Online mode Parameters Change_mode 24 x Mode 0 ode Mode fo gt Description Change_mode Changes the operating mode of the unit Mode parameters 0 Online 1 Offline Cancel Click OK to close the Parameters dialog box The function then appears in the Selected Functions list ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 169 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Procedure 10 Configure Set Bit as the second function Specify a local tag of the Bool type as the parameter You can create the tag during value assignment by clicking the arrow pointing to the right under the parameter list in the Parameters dialog box Configure the tag with the following data Name Operating mode PLC lt No PLC gt Type BOOL Both functions including the configured parameters appear in the list in the Function Key dialog box Function Key F1 24x General Enable Functions Selected Functions for E vent Key Pressed 2 El Change_mode Parameters Mode 0 Set_bit Remove Bit Mode I Show Functions Available For Selection OK Cancel Apply Close the dialog box by clicking OK 11 Right click the function key and select Copy This copies the properties of the function key you have just configured 12 Using the shortcut menu paste th
60. button ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Documenting and managing projects 7 4 Constraints with printing Printer drivers Note the following constraints with certain printer drivers e t might not be possible to print the project with CANON drivers Printing will be discontinued in this case e With the Apple laser printer the first line is not printed This problem does not occur with drivers for the HP LaserJet IIl PostScript or PostScript printers ASCII character set With some printers it is not enough simply to set the ASCII character set in the project Make sure the ASCII character set is set on the printer too ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 7 7 Documenting and managing projects Release 12 02 7 5 Example of documenting a project This example shows you how to create a customized printout 7 5 1 How to create a customized printout Objective You wish to print all the data in your project Unlike the default setting you do not want the ProTool graphic but your company logo which you have already used in your project under the name of LOGO to be printed on the cover sheet You want to leave a margin for handwritten comments on the right side of the printout Procedure O Posar O O O OOOO E Open the project from which you wish to print data Choose File
61. can be used within a message For more precise details please consult your SIMATIC STEP 7 documentation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 13 8 Communication sequence in the event of ALARM_S messages Logging On For ALARM_S More than one station for example more than one OP PU etc on a network can log on for ALARM_S messages Each station that wants to display ALARM_S messages logs on to the CPU for ALARM_S 5r S C ime ee MPI network The number of nodes that can log on to a CPU for ALARM_S depends on the CPU You will find further information on this in the equipment manual for the S7 CPU When a message event occurs When a message triggering event occurs the CPU actively sends telegrams to that effect to all stations that have logged on The message number identifies the corresponding message text that has previously been downloaded to the operating unit This means that the CPU does not have to be actively scanned for messages by regular polling as was the case with the message bit procedure The operating unit and network are completely relieved of that burden on the system Time stamp With the ALARM_S procedure the time stamp is not issued by the operating unit but by the CPU The messages are stored in chronological order on the basis of their time stamp in the message buffer on the operating u
62. can copy text and fields from the alarm message editor to the event message editor or graphic elements from one screen to another A requirement for successfully copying from one project to another is that the system limits of the destination project are not exceeded You can also copy objects between projects with different resolution If the destination system uses a lower resolution than the source system then the icons of soft keys for example are cleanly adjusted to the new resolution by an anti aliasing mechanism Preparations for new projects Before starting to copy objects from an existing project you should without fail carry out the following global settings in the new project This will ensure that no loss of data occurs due to different settings during copying e At System gt Screen Keys adjust the partition of the screen display to that in the source project e Make the option for Full Screen mode the same as in the source project by choosing System gt Settings from the View menu e Make the name and driver of the PLC the same as in the source project e Make the language settings the same as in the source project by choosing System gt Language Assignment Pasting objects in the destination project To paste objects from the Clipboard to the destination project choose Edit gt Paste from the menu The object is pasted from the Clipboard to the destination project If there is already a
63. commissioning At low transfer rates it can easily take hours to transfer the quantities of data ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 6 5 Testing projects Release 12 02 6 3 Simulation options Requirements For you to be able to simulate your project on the configuration computer ProTool Pro RT or the simulator must be installed or you transfer the project to a PC on which Runtime is installed Principle There are several ways in which you can simulate your finished project 6 6 Simulation with PLC connection You can simulate your project by letting it run directly in your Runtime software Tags and area pointers will only be able to work if your configuration computer has a connection to a suitable PLC If your computer is connected to a PLC you will achieve authentic simulation of your configured operating unit with the Runtime software To simulate with ProTool Pro RT choose File gt Test gt Start Runtime from the menu Simulation without PLC connection Using the simulation program installed with ProTool Pro RT you can simulate your project including tags and area pointers without a connection to a PLC You enter the parameters of area pointers and tags in a simulation table which is read during simulation by ProTool Pro RT To simulate with the simulator choose File gt Test gt Start Simulator from the menu Simulation in integrat
64. configure event messages and alarm messages They must be chosen at least large enough for a bit to be available for every configured message If the communication area is not made large enough a warning will be issued during compilation of the project If you wish you can create the following communication areas e PLC Acknowledgement e OP Acknowledgement Optional communication areas Acknowledgement areas for messages If the PLC is required to send an acknowledgement automatically create the following acknowledgement areas in the project window at Area Pointers e PLC Acknowledgement The acknowledgement bit is set by the PLC program and thus causes acknowledgement of the corresponding alarm message to be displayed on the operating unit The acknowledgement area PLC acknowledgement must be contiguous with the associated alarm message area must have the same acquisition cycle as the alarm message area must not be longer than the associated alarm message area For SIMOTION and OPC PLCs this acknowledgement area is set in the associated alarm message area e OP Acknowledgement The operator acknowledges an alarm message on the operating unit and thus sets the acknowledgement bit of this alarm message on the PLC When he does so the entire acknowledgement area is transferred to the PLC The OP Acknowledgement acknowledgement area must not be longer than the associated alarm message area ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 U
65. created in ProTool 5 1 The reason for this is that the operating unit can read archives and exported recipe data records correctly only if the set decimal and list separators are identical at the time of reading and writing When you change the system language to English modify the time output simultaneously to the 24 hour format since the standard width of the time field in the message view is geared to the 24 hour format Data storage in database except Windows CE devices The database is addressed by its data source name Select the database you want to use in ProTool from the Start menu at Settings gt Control Panel gt ODBC Data Sources This means that you then have the entire functionality of the database at your disposal for further processing and evaluating your archive data Basically any database featuring ODBC interface can be used The following databases have been approved e MS Data Engine 97 and 2000 e MS Access 97 and 2000 e MS SQL Server 7 0 and 2000 To enable archive data to be saved to a database a feature known as a data source name DSN must be specified during configuring instead of a directory name The DSN is used to provide a precise reference to the database and its location The data source that establishes the connection to the database must be created on the same computer as the Runtime software is stored The DSN configured there is then specified in ProTool during creation of the ar
66. date The display format is language dependent It is based on the format specified by the Windows system of your destination device You configure an analog digital clock on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the button shown Note The digital analog clock is purely a display element You cannot set the time or the date on the operating unit Use the date time display for this purpose Display The example in the figure shows an analog clock without a face The clock background has been replaced by a separate screen A typical analog clock ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 47 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 19 Configuring the date and time for Panels xP170B devices or later TP 170A 5 48 These devices can directly access the system time of the HMI device by means of the Date Time screen object The example How to configure the date and time for the xP170B or later will show you how to configure the Date Time screen object To synchronize the time with the PLC use the example How to synchronize the date and time with the PLC Since it is not possible to access the system time of the TP 170A using an input output field or an output field the PLC system time has to be displayed in an output field The examples show you how to configure the date and time on the TP 170A e How to display the date and time on the
67. execute one particular action These functions are unique on account of their names alone The Events Delete Buffer function empties the buffer for event messages for example rm C predefined action Function without input parameters However the situation is not always this clear Many functions can work in several ways Input parameters Imagine that you want to open another screen using a key on the operating unit To do this you configure the Select Screen Permanent function However your project will generally have several screens Which of these screens should ProTool open You therefore have to give the function more information This is done using parameters For the Select Screen Permanent function you specify as a parameter the name of the screen to be opened for example Another example is the function Switch Language In this case the parameter you specify is the language to be set Action depending on input parameter Function with input parameters Some functions require a single parameter others require several ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 161 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 General principle 5 162 The following figure illustrates the principle of how a function works Tag Tag How a function works An input parameter is specified for the function This can be either constant or read from a tag The
68. from a library in a screen ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 18 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 1 8 1 How to paste a coolant pump in a screen Objective You can use the SIMATIC HMI symbol library to paste in a screen say a coolant pump that flashes as a function of the value of a certain tag Procedure Procedure Open the screen in question On the Screen objects toolbar click on the adjacent button and then in the screen at the place where you want the object to appear The Symbol Library dialog box opens 3 On the Symbols tab select the pumps category at the bottom left The coolant pump is selected on the right hand side On the Style tab change the Foreground mode to Shading and set the Background type to Opaque The foreground color cannot be changed in the Shaded Foreground mode Select on the Color tab the colors for the foreground background and flashing of the coolant pump Select the Attributes tab to perform the settings for flashing Add a decimal value of 0 and assign at Flashing Of and Red as the foreground color and Green as the background color Add a decimal value of 1 and assign at Flashing On and Green as the foreground color and Red as the background color ae Force and link a control tag to the attributes Confirm by clicking OK 10 Configure an input field for the co
69. gt Print from the menu In the Print dialog box at Reports choose the Complete report You will now see the individual chapters in the Contents list in the order in which they will later be output Reports Print Quality OK 300 dpi Contents cece i SICCU Cover Chapter Summary Al Mav ae Symbolism Preview Event Messages Rages Repotts Alarm Messages g Eram 1 To Set up J Print to File Function keys ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 7 8 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Documenting and managing projects C Procedure Click the Preview button The print preview shows you how your printout will look later You want to replace the graphic on the first page cover with your company logo You want the right border to be much wider SIMATIC ProTool Pro CS pc pdb oj x T A Dne Page Zoom In zaam Close pe p PC 800 600 English USA PC 74 Exit from the preview by clicking the Print button To perform the changes you require click the Reports button The Reports dialog box is opened Repor E om p e Chapter Summary Project informations Screens Event Messages Alarm Messages Tags Sumhal lists Editeonternt Remove UG Patemeters Down To modify the margin click the Page button ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1
70. handling the product or toa particular part of the documentation Qualified Personnel Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work with this software Qualified personnel within the meaning of the safety notices of this documentation are persons capable of giving due consideration to safety engineering standards when using this software on systems Trademarks The registered trademarks of the Siemens AG can be found in the preface Impressum Editor and Publisher A amp D PT1 Copyright Siemens AG 2002 All rights reserved The transmission and reproduction of this documentation and the exploitation and communication of its contents are not allowed unless expressly granted Violators are liable for damages All rights reserved especially in the case of the granting of a patent or registration by GM Siemens AG Bereich Automation amp Drives Geschaftsgebiet SIMATIC HMI Postfach 4848 D 90327 Nuernberg Exclusion of liability We have checked the content of this publication for compliance with the described hard and software However discrepancies cannot be excluded with the result that we assume no guarantee for total compliance The information in this publication is checked regularly and any necessary corrections are included in the following editions We would be grateful for any suggestions for improvement Siemens AG 2002 Technical data subject to change Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Relea
71. integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 If you have integrated ProTool into SIMATIC STEP 7 and have used STRING type tags these tags are saved and updated by ProTool in a similar manner to SIMATIC STEP 7 The following example shows the order of the bytes when specifying the STRING 4 data type with the initial value of AB Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 5 ie string eo string for aie value ascivane value length 4 length of A of B CAB 2 Example STRING 4 type tag in ProTool ProTool Pro interprets the hexadecimal value OOH in strings as an ID for the end of the string The following characters in the string are not displayed The StringChar data type is featured in addition to the STRING data type It was included specifically for the migration of graphics oriented projects In contrast to the STRING data type the StringChar data type contains only text information It is an array of n characters where n denotes the length of the string Note Use the STRING data type in new projects Note The maximum sensible length is determined by the width of the display It differs from device to device ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 13 2 Decimal places with tags Decimal places with floating point tags With Windows based systems the possible number of decimal places with the decimal notation is always
72. is converted to Celsius by means of the TempConvert script and written to the internal ProTool tag Var_2 You can associate tag Var_2 with an output field and display it on a screen Creating the script recedes OOOO S 1 First create in ProTool the tag var_1 with connection to the PLC and select Read continuously on the Options tab Configure tag Var_2 without a connection to the PLC lt no PLC gt Call Scripts from the process window Select the General tab and then the Sub option Enter the following script name at Name TempConvert At Description enter a short description of the function such as Conversion of Fahrenheit to Celsius Select the Script Text tab Then edit the script Dim Fahrenheit Fahrenheit Var_1 Var_2 Fahrenheit 32 5 9 lo Click the Compile button to compile the script ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 234 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques The figure below shows you the Script Text dialog box with the edited and compiled script Dim Fahrenheit Fahrenheit YAR_1 VAR_2 Fahrenheit 32 5 9 Script Text dialog box ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 235 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Using the script P Procedure In the project window select the tag Var_1 and go to the Functions tab
73. lists are lists in which you assign an element from the list to each tag value With text or graphic lists for example you can label buttons dynamically display text or graphics in output fields and select texts for input in input fields To a large extent this eliminates misinterpretations in the display and operator errors during input You will find further information on using text or graphic lists on a screen in the topics dealing with input fields output fields and buttons A text list assigns text to every value of a tag At run time the tag value determines which text is selected from the list and displayed for example in an input output field on the operating unit a To create a new text list select the button illustrated on the toolbar Note The configurable range of values in a text list ranges from 0 to 32767 for a maximum of 3500 different blocks of text A graphic list assigns a graphic to every value of a tag At run time the tag value determines which graphic is selected from the list and displayed for example in an output field on the operating unit To create a new graphics list select the button illustrated on the toolbar ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 5 Creating graphics and text Using graphics You can configure static and dynamic graphics in ProTool e Static graphics Stat
74. logical relationships in accordance with the messages The compilation process has been properly completed e Warnings The project contains errors that might result in incomplete display on the operating unit The full compilation process has been completed e Errors Correct the errors listed and recompile the project The compilation process is not completed ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 6 13 Testing projects Release 12 02 6 7 2 Error messages while downloading Possible problems while downloading While a project is being downloaded to the operating unit status messages on the progress of the compilation process are output to a window If problems occur while the project is being downloaded to the operating unit the cause in the majority of cases is too high a baud rate or the simultaneous use of other drivers on the configuration computer for example when connected to a network The most common causes of discontinuation of the download process are listed below Downloading is aborted after a Line Error message The connecting cable is too Select a lower baud rate long The connecting cable is Select a lower baud rate poorly shielded or spurious signals are imported onto the cable by other devices Computer performance is Select a lower baud rate inadequate Another driver is running in Select a lower baud rate the background for example
75. message number and from this number the corresponding message text is determined and read out Technological alarms Display error states They are initiated by the technological objects and can be displayed on the operating unit Diagnostic events Are entered in the S7 CPU diagnostic buffer and can be displayed on the operating unit Their purpose is to provide above all information on quicker and easier retrieval and troubleshooting For what purpose do you use messages 5 112 The messaging system is responsible for the following tasks e Signaling events or states that can occur on the system or in the process A state is reported immediately following its occurrence The messages are displayed for the operator as a function of their significance priority e Support in eliminating the cause of error conditions Messages provide in depth information on the causes of errors diagnostics The operator can then influence the process on the basis of the message To make this easier for the operator you can include the Edit button in a message view and configure a function for this button for example selecting a specific screen e Reporting The message events are output to a printer e Archiving The message events are stored for further processing and evaluation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 2 The c
76. name at Name DegreesCelsius At Description enter a short description of the function such as Conversion of Fahrenheit to Celsius Enter Fahrenheit in the parameter field and click the Add button Select the Script Text tab Then edit the script DegreesCelsius Fahrenheit 32 5 9 1 iz 10 10 Click the Compile button to compile the script ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 237 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 The figure below shows you the Script Text dialog box with the edited and compiled script GradCelsius Fahrenheit 32 5 9 Script Text dialog box ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 238 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Using the script Procedure In the project window select the tag Var_1 and go to the Functions tab 2 Assign the script DegreesCelsius to the event Value Change by clicking the Add button Specify tag Var_1 as the input parameter Fahrenheit identified by in 4 Specify the tag Var_2 for the return value identified by out The figure below shows the parameter assignment Parameters GradCelsius AES Return Yalue out Fahrenheit in Fahrenheit in Description GradCelsius aan GradCelsius to Fahrenheit a Click OK to conclude parameter input The figure below shows
77. not start projects from networks but from your local drive Network access times are frequently too long Large small Windows fonts In configurations that you create on a configuration computer with small Windows fonts and then open on a computer with large windows fonts or start on the operating unit Runtime the text on configured buttons appears too large Therefore when different computers are being used make sure that the Windows fonts set are identical The following applies to devices in the Windows CE family As a general rule set small Windows fonts on the configuration computer so that the WYSIWYG functionality is not lost Available disk storage Your drive should have free disk storage space Take note of Microsoft s recommendations for the Windows system in this respect More working memory Memory requirements rise in proportion to the number and size of the screen objects you are using An increase in available main memory reduces processing times considerably System resources Make sure when you are working with ProTool that you have 20 to 40 MB of main memory available and at least 65 free system resources You will find information on this topic in Explorer by choosing Help gt About Increase the size of your main memory with additional RAM or virtual memory as necessary Additional system resources are released by closing other applications ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows
78. of PC as configuration computer and SIMATIC Panel PC as operating unit Authorization If you install the ProTool Pro RT runtime software on a standard PC or ona SIMATIC Panel PC you require authorization for unrestricted use If authorization is not available ProTool Pro RT runs in Demo mode e PC The authorization has to be ordered separately e SIMATIC operating units with enclosed runtime software You purchased the authorization for SIMATIC operating units with enclosed runtime software such as the Panel PC 670 with the unit it is enclosed with the unit e Plug and play SIMATIC operating units No authorization is required for plug and play SIMATIC operating units such as TP 170B or MP 270 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 1 2 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Introducing ProTool ProTool is easy to use and versatile The fully graphical user interface of ProTool CS allows you to create object oriented symbol based projects easily by mouse click No special programming knowledge is required ProTool features e User friendly process visualization with a large selection of standardized input output fields bar graphs trend views raster and vector graphics and attributes with dynamic capability e An integrated message system e Archiving of process values and messages e User functions on the basis of Visual Basic Script e Drivers for connection to the SIMATIC S5 S
79. of array tags in ProTool makes sense if you read in values sequentially or if you have to configure several tags of the same type e History trends To specifically access the values of the history trend configure an array tag You can have all acquired values of the history trend read out by gradual incrementing of the index tag e Recipes If you have a large number of tags of the same type you can configure an array tag with the corresponding number of elements In this way you can cut your configuration time because you only have to configure one tag Furthermore performance is improved in Runtime when process data are being transferred Special features and constraints Even if you only have the value of an array element displayed ProTool treats an array tag as one tag and therefore always reads all the contents of the array element If an array tag is connected to the PLC all contents will be consequently transferred upon a change as a general rule You therefore cannot write to the same array tag simultaneously from the operating unit and the PLC Note To avoid unnecessary system loading you should use array tags only where values are not subject to frequent change Note If you have configured large arrays such as more than 50 word elements that are read cyclically trend plots and tag archives are influenced unfavorably The following constraints apply to array tags e They can consist only of one dimension
80. on the Settings tab or you specify only a drive such as C an archive will not be created Note To the extent possible avoid using spaces in the path name If you cannot avoid them place path names containing spaces in quotation marks When you archive process data to a floppy disk archiving is terminated without checkback when the floppy disk is full The data are stored in the file in compliance with the Microsoft CSV standard that is in a text file that has entries containing freely definable separators You will find the list separator set on your system on the Start menu at Settings gt Control Panel gt Regional Settings on the tab labeled Numbers All data are stored as ANSI characters CSV files can be read in and processed by other programs for the purpose of evaluating the data Note In the case of Windows CE devices the internal FLASH memory cannot be specified as a storage location ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 175 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Note The following applies to Windows CE devices In ProTool 5 2 and higher the regional options such as format of the date and time and decimal and list separators are German by default Modify this setting or replace the separators in the file as necessary if you are using archives or exported recipe data records in ProTool 5 2 or higher that you
81. on the operating unit for any length of time e f you do not enter an input on the operating unit for a configured period of time logout time the operating unit automatically resets the current password level to 0 You set the logout time by choosing System gt Settings from the menu The system default setting is 5 minutes Note Login and logout operations are automatically output as system messages If you have configured a message archive all login and logout operations on the operating unit will be archived Setting the password level on the operating unit The following PLC jobs are available for setting a defined password level on the operating unit e You can use PLC job 23 to set a password level of your choice on the operating unit from the PLC in order to allow access by a defined user group for example e You can use PLC job 24 to reset the password level back to 0 from the PLC In online Help you will find a list of all possible PLC jobs with job numbers and parameters in PLC jobs in alphabetical order and PLC jobs in numerical order ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 224 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 13 11 Password administration Purpose So that an operator can use the operating unit to enter and change passwords and user names including their associated password levels for operators you configure a password list
82. opens automatically whenever an alarm message arrives enable and disable the event message window by choosing the function Display_Event_Message_Window Windowlline SS An alarm message is displayed in the ________Message line message window whereas an event message is displayed on the message line The message line is visible at all times The alarm message window opens automatically whenever an alarm message arrives t Window OFF M An alarm message is displayed in the message window Event messages are not displayed Line line S a a y The message line is visible at all times Any Message line alarm messages or event messages that are issued are displayed on the message line according to their priority Message view Choose Insert gt Display Message from the menu to configure a message view on a screen You can set what you want to have displayed in the message view Messages Message events S7 diagnostic buffer Contents of a message archive You can customize the appearance and behavior of the message display to suit your project Colored messages You can assign different colors to different types of messages in order immediately to make the message type clear to the operator This means for example that you can configure alarm messages and event messages in different colors by choosing System gt Messages gt Colors from the menu ProTool V6
83. or graphics which visualize the current state of the state area The figure shows differently configured state areas gt EE ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 33 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 10 Buttons Purpose Labeling Operation A button is a virtual key on the operating unit screen to which you can assign one or more functions You operate a button with a pointing device such as a mouse or by hand in the case of touch operated devices You create buttons on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the button shown You can label buttons statically or dynamically with text or graphics e Static labeling When configuring the button enter a text or select a graphic This type of labeling is static which means that it is not changed on the operating unit e Dynamic labeling When configuring the button select a text or graphics list and an associated index tag The value of the index tag determines which list element is displayed on the button at run time Pressing clicking and releasing a button triggers the functions that you set for these events If a button is pressed by mistake and the function is not supposed to be triggered the operator can keep the button pressed and move the mouse pointer for example or his finger for touch panels away from the button This process is not interpreted as a releas
84. perform device specific message settings in SIMATIC STEP 7 all message events will always be logged directly on the attached printer If you configure device specific messages you can specify separately for each message whether it is to be logged or not Messages are always printed in the order in which they are sent by the CPUs This is also the case with every synchronization Note If there are several CPUs in a network this means that messages need not always be received in chronological order by the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 148 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 14 Examples of configuring messages These examples show you e How to configure an alarm message e How to create message areas for different devices e How system messages might appear depending on the operating unit Note The examples essentially describe how to configure bit messages The configuration of ALARM_S messages is described in the SIMATIC STEP 7 and SIMOTION SCOUT documentation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 149 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 14 1 How to configure alarm messages Objective You want to set the alarm message area and configure an alarm message with a SIMATIC 300 or SIMATIC 400 PLC In this example you will configure the alar
85. selecting the symbol shown or by choosing Insert gt Switch from the menu Display You can configure the switch in both the horizontal and vertical directions the ON position of the switch toggle is freely selectable You can label the switch and also visually highlight the current switch status with a background color PUMP 3 ON OFF LIII Switch position marked by a background color Tag linking The table shows which value the tag assumes when the switch is pressed Value Value BOOL tag type integer tag switched on TRUE When linked to an integer tag the switch shows the status switched off only if the tag has the value 0 With any other value the switch is switched on ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 40 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Mouse and keyboard operation Switches can be operated by the touch panel the mouse and the keyboard e The operator can move the switch directly with the mouse or by touch When you Click in the slide opening the switch is immediately set to the opposite position and the tag to the corresponding value e From the keyboard the operator can select the switch with TAB the border will then be shown as dashed and then toggle it with SPACEBAR ENTER Triggered events If the status of the switch is changed by an operator input this triggers the following events e Switch on as soon as the
86. states When operate it changes from one state to the other and retains that state until it is operated again e Pushbutton The pushbutton has a stable idle condition When operated it goes to the pressed state and retains this state for the whole time it remains pressed It then reverts automatically to the released idle condition Switch type e Tag connection For the switch type state button you can configure a tag which represents the current state of the switch and can also change it Functions that you assign to the switch are triggered only by operating the switch and not by any change in the value of the configured tag If you wish you can define a value for the configured tag that represents the pressed state not for BOOL type tags The table shows which value the tag assumes when the switch is pressed Value Value BOOL tag type integer tag TRUE 1 Configured value n FALSE 0 For each of n different values ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 35 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 When linked to an integer tag the switch shows the pressed state only if the tag accepts the configured value n With any other value the released state is displayed Text graphic display For the two states pressed and released you can configure different pieces of text or graphics which visualize the current state of the switch The figu
87. switch changes from OFF to ON e Switch off as soon as the switch changes from ON to OFF e Status change each time the switch status changes ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 41 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 15 Slider controls Purpose Settings 5 42 Use a slider control to enter and display numerical values in analog form Values are entered by moving the operable slider for example with the mouse or the arrow keys to the desired position When it is used as a display element the value to be displayed is derived from the position of the moving slider ll Create a slider control by selecting the symbol illustrated The slider control is linked to a tag When you move the operator controllable slider the corresponding value is written to the tag Conversely when the tag value is changed so is the position of the moving slider unless this is just being changed by the operator Apart from the tag containing the value to be displayed entered you can define other tags in order for example to modify dynamically the values for the upper and lower stop at run time In addition you can configure among other things the following attributes e Labeling e Axis labeling e Scaling e Current value numerical e Bar chart ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Rele
88. systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 14 1 Using ProTool objects in scripts Overview of ProTool objects The following ProTool objects can be used and edited when programming scripts e Tags e Functions e Scripts e Screens Notes on using tags e You can use a script for example to read a value from a tag convert it and assign it to the tag again e Query BOOL tags The two logic states TRUE and FALSE are represented in VBScript by the values 1 TRUE and 0 FALSE Example This is how you query the logic state TRUE of tag Bool_Var IF Bool Var lt gt 0 Please note that the logical states in VBScript are not the same as the definitions for BOOL tags in ProTool Status VBScript BOOL tag in ProTool C fo S SSCCSCSCSCSCS Tag types permitted for OLE applications Only use Western European characters in data record names If you wish to read to or write from tags in the Runtime software with another application such as a spreadsheet program note that Visual Basic only supports the following programs e Unsigned char 8 bit unsigned e Short int 16 bit signed e Long int 32 bit signed e Float 4 byte floating point e Bstr OLE Automation string e Bool 1 TRUE 0 FALSE e Arrays with the above named types You will find an example of access to Runtime tags on the ProTool CS CD ROM at Docs FSpec ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User
89. that is used is not present and there is no other STEP 7 symbol that has the same address In case 1 the ProTool tag is linked to the STEP 7 symbol In case 4 an error message is issued and the ProTool tag cannot be linked and has to be corrected manually ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 3 11 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Release 12 02 Procedure In case 2 and 3 you have the following options e Connect button The ProTool tag is linked to the STEP 7 symbol Disconnect button The ProTool tag is identified as not being symbolically linked Jump button This can be used to postpone the decision to a later run The ProTool tag remains in the error state and is not connected 5 After ProTool Tag Management is executed the symbolic connection is restored to the extent possible Note The ProTool tags that could not be successfully connected gain are read out to the output window Tag connection for SIMOTION Note The connection to symbols is normally lost as a result of renaming objects in SIMOTION SCOUT You will find more information in the section Process communication gt SIMATIC S7 gt SIMOTION ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 3 12 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 Creating and editing projects Here you obtain an
90. the COM port in the Properties window of the device manager Modify the configuration of your computer or install ProTool on a stand alone computer Exit from the programs and reboot your computer if necessary For the CP which has to be used for the Download operation the configured mode is set Such as when using the SIMATIC NET CD 7 2001 On the PU PC Panel the S7ONLINE access point is not on a physical device CP5611 MPI for example This might be the case with an installed SIMATIC NET CD 7 2001 for example Go to the Configuration Console tool and set PG operation for the CP Check the network parameters baud rate MPI address Perform the download from ProTool CS Reset the configured mode for the CP Go to the PU PC Panel tool or if you are using the SIMATIC NET CD 7 2001 to the Configuration Console tool and set the S7ONLINE access point to the device you require Check the network parameters baud rate MPI address Perform the download from ProTool CS Reset the S7ONLINE access point to the original device ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 6 15 Testing projects Release 12 02 6 16 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Documenting and managing projects 7 Documenting and managing projects This chapter details the multipl
91. the button containing the Direct Key function is concealed e Operate message window e Cancel screen saver ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques e Enter a value using the on screen keyboard e Run an external application such as Internet Explorer e Activate the wipe screen e ProTool recipe dialog boxes Note The Direct Key function can be used only once per button Behavior of DP direct keys in Offline mode If the Mode function is triggered with the Offline parameter on the operating unit the connection to the configured PLC or PLCs is cleared Note The configuring engineer has to give due consideration in as far as STEP 7 and ProTool are concerned The DP direct keys remain active in this instance If you operate a button having the Direct Key function in Offline mode or operate a corresponding button ona key operated device the associated bit is set on the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 39 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 14 Switches Purpose A switch is used to input and output a binary status it can only be on or off The OFF status corresponds to the value 0 or FALSE of the tag linked to the switch All tag values which are not the same as zero are interpreted as ON Fs Create a switch by
92. the cable is plugged in the PLC is operational the correct interface is used Reboot the system if the system message is displayed continuously Check the access rights Check for example whether the server name is correct the computer name is correct the server is registered Check for example whether the server name is correct the computer name is correct the server is registered Information for experienced users Interpret the value from HRESULT Configure the server as OutProc Server or Local Server Do not start a second project with OPC server functionality on the computer ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 13 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 160015 Could not start deviceCOM software for Perform an operating system OPC communication download To do this observe the online Help for ProSave Should the problem still i persist contact the Hotline 160016 Could not start deviceCOM transport If you have manually software for OPC communication modified the deviceCOM parameters on the operating unit check the changes you made Should the problem still persist contact the Hotline 170000 S7 diagnostics messages are not displayed because it is not possible to logon to the S7 diagnostics with this unit The service program is not supported 170001 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be S
93. the function Start_sequence_archive No sequence archive is created 80023 An attempt was made to copy an archive to itself The archive is not copied 80024 The function Copy_archive is configured not to permit copying when the target archive already contains data Parameter Write mode The archive is not copied 80025 The copy action is interrupted Data written up to this point is retained Deletion of the target table if configured is not executed The cancellation is documented by an error entry RT_ERR at the end of the target table 80026 The message is issued after all the archives have been successfully initialized Values are written in the archives from this moment on Prior to this no values are archived even though the runtime software is operating 80027 The internal Flash memory has been specified as the memory location for an archive This is not permissible No values will be archived for this archive and the archive will not be created Wait until the current copying actions have been completed and restart the last copy action Wait until the current copying action has been completed and restart the last action Check the project for the following the function Start_sequence_archive is correctly configured the variable parameters are being correctly provided at the operating unit Check the project for the following the function Copy_archive is correctly configure
94. the operating unit e For one tag you can configure a simple linear conversion between different scale ranges in the Tag dialog box on the Conversion tab e Anexample of this would be conversion between two units of measurement such as degrees centigrade and degrees Fahrenheit e For all other kinds of linear conversion with several tags use the Scaling Linear_1and Scaling Linear 2 functions or scripts Peculiarities with functions and scripts Conversions that are performed automatically are configured for the Value Change event of a tag Since in a reciprocal conversion a distinction must be drawn depending on whether the value of the tag changes when it originates from the PLC or from the operating unit an auxiliary tag has to be used The figure below outlines what happens Inputfoutput field PLC VAR 1 Event without PLC Value change connection VAR 2 with PLC connection Function Script Scaling 1 Function Script Scaling 2 Reciprocal conversion ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 165 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 166 When an entry is made in the input output field the following takes place 1 The value of the VAR_1 tag changes 2 The function or script for converting from VAR_1 to VAR_2 is triggered by the value change event 3 Since VAR_2 has a connection to the
95. the report configure the Print Report function for a function key for example Output language By controlling the language you can create reports in different languages The procedure is the same as for screens in the screen editor At run time the report is then printed in the language set on the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 104 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Special situations when printing For the report to be printed correctly the printer that is connected at run time must support the paper format and report layout Reports are printed in Graphics mode Owing to the volumes of data involved a network or USB printer should be used Note When used on Windows CE devices make sure which printers the operating unit is able to support Printing tag values in reports The value of a tag included in a report is read and issued only at the precise moment the report is printed In the case of multipage reports there may be a considerable time difference between the first and last page It is therefore possible for one and the same tag to appear with a different value on say the first and last pages ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 105 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 8 1 Purpose Printing messages in a report The contents of the messag
96. three scenarios are typical applications in practice concerning the subject of recipes ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 9 1 How to create a recipe Task In this example you create a recipe for the mixing station of a fruit juice system Different fruit juices are to be mixed using the same system The ingredients are the same only the mixing proportions are different Quantity in tank in 1 Tank 12 7 Ss Tanki J Tank 2 ________ Bottling machine _____ Mixing unit Tank 1 Tank 2 Tank 3 o a oO Quantity in Valve 4 mixer I to bottling machine Soft key button Fixed window Example of a Screen Mixing Station You begin by creating a recipe called mixture and then a data record with the name juice This data record contains the mixing proportions for orange juice The data record is transferred to the PLC using the synchronized transfer option i e a data mailbox is required During transfer of the data record the operating unit sets bits in the status word of the data mailbox You then have to set the status word to zero in the PLC program in order to enable the data mailbox again The task involves the following steps e Creating a recipe e Configuring the recipe view e Transferring a project file to the operating unit e Creating a data record on the operating unit e Transfe
97. trend display Auxiliary line 11 30 00 25 06 99 07 00 00 18 59 06 25 06 99 25 06 99 Example of a trend display and input field ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 178 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 11 4 Options for configuring archives What can an archive contain Windows based systems offer you the opportunity to archive process data in other words store them permanently and analyze them Depending on the process data saved there are different types of archive e Message archivesA message archive is used to store the message events of one or more message classes event messages alarm messages system messages You are only able however to assign one specific archive to each message class Since login and logout operations are automatically output as system messages you can also archive all logins and logouts with the message archive e Tag archivesA tag archive contains the values of one or more tags at specific points in time You are only able however to assign one specific archive to each tag The properties of an archive such as its storage location etc are defined in the Archives dialog box You will find an archiving model for a project in Archiving process data How do you archive process data Usually messages and tags are archived over the entire duration of the process If an archive is full either the sequenc
98. value is not read directly from the PLC after the address is changed ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 78 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 6 Multiplexing tags Definition With tag multiplexing tags are modified as a function of the value of an index tag Purpose of tag multiplexing With tag multiplexing you can access a number of tags which you saved in a multiplex tag by means of an index tag To visualize machines of identical types you only have to configure one screen thus saving memory on the destination device and also configuration time You can implement switching between the different views by means of a selection list for example for which you configure an index tag Configuring a multiplex tag You define a multiplex tag by selecting the Multiplex tag entry in the Properties dialog box of the screen object you want to configure Value No Tag gt x BAE Tag v Multiplex tag m Alignment Array Element Left Top Center C Center Hew C Bight C Bottom Edi Hename Duplicate OK Cancel Apply ROO OE All configured multiplex tags are displayed in the selection list You can select an existing multiplex tag or create a new one by clicking New on the menu In the Multiplex tag dialog box create a list of tags and select the associated index tag Note You can also create a multiplex ta
99. window Objective On the operating unit you wish to display a trend showing the archive data from a certain point in time onward This means that the operator will be able to access the particular time slot quickly and easily and without having to spend a great deal of time scrolling on the screen Configuring an input field for an archive trend J Procedure Configure a Date Time field for entering the start time for displaying the archive data Select a tag without PLC connection as the data source in Date Time format Name VAR_15 PLC lt No PLC gt Type DATETIME In the trend display go to the Axis Scaling tab and select the tag VAR_15 Result When the operator enters a date and a time on the operating unit in this input field the archive data for the specified moment in time onward will be displayed Note For a message display go to the General tab and select a tag with the starting time ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 184 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 Creating recipes Purpose The purpose of recipes is to be able to transfer collectively and synchronously multiple items of data that belong together from the operating unit to the PLC and vice versa Principle The terms recipe and data record should be defined using the example of a filing cabinet as they are important for later understanding
100. wish to connect a tag Changes to the symbol table in SIMATIC STEP 7 are updated in ProTool e You assign symbolic names once only and use them in SIMATIC STEP 7 and ProTool For this purpose you must assign as name to a DB data block in the SIMATIC STEP 7 symbol table If this is not the case this DB is not offered for selection in the ProTool Tags dialog box e ALARM_S messages configured in SIMATIC STEP 7 are supported by ProTool and can be output to the operating unit Switching STEP 7 integration from ProTool A ProTool installation with integration in SIMATIC STEP 7 provides you the menu item ProTool Integration in STEP 7 under the File menu in ProTool This allows you to integrate ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 or to operate it in stand alone mode After changing to integration mode ProTool is automatically restarted Integration of ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 is still possible in ProTool Setup irrespective of this In integrated mode it is also possible to copy single configurations from STEP 7 You can then edit them in ProTool stand alone mode e g on another configuration computer Integrating specific ProTool configurations and copying them from STEP 7 3 2 Configurations generated in ProTool stand alone mode cannot be called directly in SIMATIC Manager To be able to implement such configurations in a STEP 7 project you need to integrate them Execute by selecting the menu item File gt Integrate in STEP
101. you can display an additional window with blocks of reference text in the original language Station de m lange Quantit en r serve Cen 1 41234 1234 41734 P servoir i R servoir R servoir 3 tat Biwande Fo ab pr fun Gee S in iti EEN ae Tank i Tank 2 Volume dans le m langeur 1 i Fi 34 Fillim im the Reference text ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques In the editor you can insert the translation of the blocks of text in the reference window text without having to switch from one language to another Note Text can be exported by choosing Edit gt Language gt Export from the menu or by using the shortcut menu in the project window The blocks of text can be translated independently of ProTool in this way too and then imported in your project ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 247 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 15 6 Steps to creating a multilingual project Scenarios Steps 5 248 The basic approach is identical no matter whether You configure a project in a language other than that of your ProTool installation Example you have ProTool in German and would like to create a French project You want to sell a project to several countries in the language of the countries concerned
102. you wished to have replaced as referenced objects with replacement via the Clipboard Select the object types you require This setting is not saved locally for the project but globally for the application An archive has been configured for an archive If this tag is now copied from the source project to the Clipboard and replaced in the destination project the referenced archive object is replaced if you have selected the Archive object type in the Replace Setting dialog box and the archive object is already present with the same name in the destination project If the archive object is not in the destination project a new object is created and linking of the tags expanded Destination project The tag VAR1 WORD data type has a limit tag VAR2 This in its turn references the three functions FKT1 FKT2 and FKTS3 FETIMVART FRT2 vARA FETI ARA Source project Tag VAR2 BYTE data type references the function FKTX GW VAR2 VWVORD VARZ FETXIVART Byte VARS Result Limit value tag VAR2 has been replaced by tag VAR2 from the source project VARI GW VARZ FKTX VARI vVORD Byte VARS Object linking is not changed by the substitution merely the contents of the object are inserted and additional linking added All the objects referenced by the inserted objects are also pasted in the destination project Should errors occur in the project during the substitution operation they are reported in the same wa
103. 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 122 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Sort criterion for alarm messages Should several unacknowledged alarm messages having the same priority be queued on the operating unit you can select by choosing System gt Messages gt Settings from the menu whether the oldest first or the most recent last alarm message will be displayed first ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 123 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 9 Message view Purpose 5 124 In ProTool the default is for event messages alarm messages and the operating unit HMI system messages to be displayed in special process windows As an alternative the message view provides a display in tabular form of e Messages Queued messages Messages are queued messages until the cleared message event occurs even if the message has previously been acknowledged Messages To Be Acknowledged Messages are messages awaiting acknowledgement queued messages until the acknowledged message event occurs even if the message has previously been cleared Since system and event messages are not acknowledged they are not displayed among the messages to be acknowledged e Message events e Contents of the diagnostic buffer of a SIMATIC 300 SIMATIC 400 or SIMOTION CPU not possible with WinAC and OPC Sin
104. 02 5 13 9 Dynamic screen objects What do we mean by dynamic positioning You can dynamically modify the position of objects that you use on a screen This means that the values set in your project for the horizontal and vertical positions can be changed at run time Dynamic positioning is possible with screen objects such as bar graphs or input output fields text or graphics In this way you can move a graphic on the screen for example in order to visualize the current position of a conveying belt on the operating unit How dynamic positioning works 5 222 When you are configuring you normally set the X and Y coordinates for the different objects You define these values either explicitly in the Properties dialog box for the object concerned on the Position tab or indirectly by positioning with the mouse You can view the X and Y coordinates while you are configuring by choosing View gt Size Position from the menu The X and Y values for the initial position and the size of the object are applied automatically and displayed in the dialog box To position an object dynamically specify tags for the X and or Y coordinates at Offset The current values of these tags determine the step length which is added at run time to the X and Y values of the start position In this way the position of the object varies with time on the screen of the operating unit If the coordinate values exceed those permissible at run time th
105. 06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Result The system time of the operating unit is then displayed in the Date Time field The Editing allowed setting supports direct write access to the system time of the operating unit You can set the time by entering a new time in the Date Time field The system time of the XP170B can be synchronized with the system time of the PLC using the PLC Date Time area pointer PLC job 41 can be used to synchronize the system time of the PLC with the system time of the XP170B ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 67 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 3 Using tags Purpose Definition Tag types 5 68 Since tags are the most important means of communication between the operating unit and the PLC and for exchanging data a detailed explanation is presented here of what tags are and what types of tag are used in ProTool A tag has a symbolic name and a defined data type The value of the tag changes while the PLC program is being executed Tags with a PLC link are referred to as global tags Tags without a PLC link are known as local tags e Global tags A tag with a PLC link occupies a defined memory address on the PLC to which read and write access is possible from both the operating unit and the PLC e Local tags Local tags are not connected to the PLC They are available only on the operating unit Yo
106. 06 1AB0 5 241 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Reference language One of the project languages can be used as the reference language You can first create all the blocks of text in the Reference language and then use them as a basis for other translations when you enter your translated text directly into the project When you are configuring you can toggle between the reference language and the editing language you have set Online languages on the operating unit You can even download several of these project languages simultaneously to the operating unit depending on the operating unit For the operator to be able to toggle between these languages you must provide him with a suitable control When creating your configuration note that the languages supported at run time depend on the operating unit __ Project languages Se i Online Language levels in ProTool Exchanging text with translators 5 242 If you wish to send the blocks of text in the reference language for translation you can export all blocks of text in a project from ProTool The translator can edit the blocks of text outside ProTool either in Excel for example or a text editor The translated blocks of text are then imported into your ProTool project and automatically inserted at the correct places ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration tec
107. 1MA06 1AB0 5 25 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 3 Purpose Usage Tag linking 5 26 Input fields for date and time Using the input field for date and time you can enter calendar dates and time specifications in the selected format The format depends on the language currently set on the operating unit It complies with international conventions The figure shows an example of one input field for the time and one for the date for English speaking countries 3 29 00 2 32 09 PM The input field for the date and time is especially useful for operating units such as the TP 170 A whose range of functions does not include the Display Date Time screen object Depending on the display you chose date or time you can configure a tag of the relevant type for the input field The operating unit writes the values you enter to the tag In addition the tag presents you with the option of assigning a start value to the input field Note In order to be able to change calendar dates and specifications of times on the operating unit with the input field the configured tag must have a connection to a SIMATIC S7 The system time on the operating unit cannot be directly changed by means of the input field but must be implemented by means of the Date Time Display object ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques
108. 4 8 definable project colors ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 13 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Note Screen objects message views trend graphics recipes buttons etc are also affected by the color settings on the control panel In Windows 2000 the default color settings on the Control Panel have been changed compared to earlier operating systems Windows 98 and Windows NT Screen objects for example are shown in a lighter gray than the background To adjust it again select the Appearance tab at File gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display Select the setting Windows Classic from the list shown at Scheme ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 14 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 1 5 Fonts Purpose Settings In all screen objects which contain static or dynamic texts you can assign parameters to the appearance of the texts to mark the significance of individual texts within a screen For example you can select the font the font style and the font size and set additional effects such as strikethrough and underscore Perform all the settings in the Properties dialog box of the relevant screen object on the Font tab In the case of screen objects with a number of texts to which parameters can be assigned such as message view status control
109. 4 It is possible that coordination is not executed 200005 No more data is read or written Check that the cable is Possible causes connected and the PLC is in order Reboot the system if the The PLC does not respond is system message is displayed defective etc continuously The cable is defective The system is overloaded 210000 Jobs are not processed because the Change the address or set up address configured in the PLC does not the address in the PLC exist has not been set up 210001 Jobs are not processed because the Change the address or set up address configured in the PLC cannot be the address in the PLC in an written to read from area which can be written to read from 210002 Commands are not executed because Internal error the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format 210003 The job mailbox is processed again because the last error status has been eliminated return to normal operation 210004 Itis possible that the job mailbox is not processed 210005 A PLC job was triggered by an Check the PLC program impermissible number ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 17 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 210006 A fault occurred while attempting to execute the PLC job The PLC job is therefore not executed Observe the subsequent previous system message if appropriate
110. 4 If the RIGHT arrow key is operated PLC_1 STOP by operating Stop switch SIMATIC diagnostic buffer Message text of diagnostic events are read out with the appropriately configured message view No Time oat fon et OOSC S 16387 09 36 24 12 06 98 a STOP by operating Stop switch 20493 09 36 25 12 06 98 New startup information in operating state STOP 4225 09 36 28 12 06 98 Kk Manual restart request restart Manual restart request ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 154 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 14 5 Event messages export file Structure Below you can see how the export file of the illustrated event messages is structured gt Event Messages op27 pab TS ES 1 10 20 30 40 5I 0000 0001 Motor off 0002 Motor switched on 0003 Operating temperature reached Var temp SIMATIC ProTool Pro B5 0 0 20 d 16 06 98 11 31 20 Legend N Number T Text I Help information A Attributes V Tag L Text lists Pieces of text may be distributed over several T lines Help information may be distributed over several I lines In message text T the following control characters are possible n New line b Flash Start End u Underscore Start End ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 155 Co
111. 61 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 19 3 How to synchronize the date and time with the PLC Procedure With the TP 170A synchronization of the PLC system time is only necessary if you have configured Single message view Single message view is the only screen element of the TP 170A that accesses the system time of the device This constraint applies solely to the TP 170A not to xP170B Note The example applies to a connection for a S7 300 or S7 400 The differences from a S7 200 connection are pointed out The figures show the settings for a connection to a S7 300 or S7 400 Procedure Double click Area pointer in the project window The Paste New Area Pointer dialog box appears Insert a new area pointer 21x Available types OK Event Messages Cancel Select the area pointer PLC Date Time and click OK to parameterize the area pointer The PLC Date Time dialog box appears ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 62 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques _ Procedure Perform the following parameter settings in the PLC Date Time dialog box 7 300 or S7 400 Acquisition cycle s 15 Area DB DB 2 DBW 0 S7 200 Acquisition cycle s 15 Area V VB 400 Date Time PLC General PLC PLC_1 z Range DB DE Length words E Lew Acquisition Cycle s fi y omo a Note The
112. 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 249 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 15 7 Exchanging text with translators Editing blocks of text external to ProTool If you configure a project in several languages the simplest approach is to create and test the complete project in one language first You can then pass all the blocks of text to translation and after that include the translated text in your project The advantages of this procedure are as follows The workload of the configuration engineer is reduced since he only has to create the user interface in a language familiar to him The translator can edit the blocks of text outside ProTool either in Excel or a text editor The translated blocks of text will be complete and consistent Scope of text export import Using the ProTool s text export import function you can export and import blocks of text for the whole project text from specific editors or text of separate objects The scope of export import depends on the command Export import blocks of text for the complete project When you issue a command to export import text by choosing Edit gt Language gt Export or Import on the menu all blocks of text for the complete project are exported or imported The import operation cannot be undone But you can remove all blocks of text in a language from the project by deleting that language You will find detailed information by referring to Deleting a project language
113. 7 5 22 5 26 5 46 Display 5 22 Enter overview Time display Time window Touch panel Touch operated devices Configuration notes Transfer Data records Translating projects Translating texts for multilingual projects Trend view Overview Trends Triggering functions Triggering trends Type Types of tags U Undo Undo actions Undo buffer Undoing and redoing actions Undoing the last action Update symbol table Updating tags Updating tags Performance Updating the operating unit Upload Use of resources Useful functions when editing projects User interface language User defined functions Using area pointers Using functions Using ProTool objects in VBScript Using tags Using tags in several fields VBScript VBScript in ProTool Vector graphic elements Vector graphics Version Virtual key Visual Basic Script WwW Windows CE Control Panel Windows based systems Working with a SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library Example Working with SIMATIC Manager Working with Windows CE Control Panel eg P N ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Index Release 12 02 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems l 8 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0
114. 7 03 99 K Q Boiler 13 Temperature degrees Notify shift supervisor 14 40 37 27 03 99 KQ G Boiler 13 Temperature 120 degrees Notify shift supervisor If a message contains process values then those values that were available when the message event arrived or departed are stored in the message buffer In the case of the acknowledged message status the operating unit does not acquire any current process values The characters stand for the value ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 142 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Example 2 Lost connection situation The operating unit logs back onto the S7 CPU following a lost connection By that time the message is no longer stored in the S7 CPU The following is displayed on the operating unit No Time Date Stas Tet O oOo U U 14 28 08 27 03 99 K Boiler 13 Temperature 190 degrees Notify shift supervisor 14 52 11 27 03 99 KQG Boiler 13 Temperature HHH degrees Notify shift supervisor As the message is no longer stored in the S7 CPU the operating unit will not be able to read its process values These are replaced by characters Note After an interrupt the new status of a message in the message buffer is not known Only the message status before the update is shown in the message buffer in this instance for example KQG These message states cannot be displayed in the
115. 7 project in ProTool Vice versa if you want to use ProTool in stand alone mode to edit projects created in SIMATIC STEP 7 in integrated mode and without having SIMATIC STEP 7 available you must first generate a copy of these configuration files offline of STEP 7 To do this select the menu item File gt Copy from STEP 7 project in your ProTool application Note When you open a stand alone project there can no longer be automatic synchronization of the database between SIMATIC STEP 7 and ProTool You therefore have to ensure that the shared database is resynchronized for example by re integrating if changes are made to the STEP 7 program ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 3 1 How to start ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 General There are two ways in which you can start ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 e By means of SIMATIC Manager e Directly in Windows Starting ProTool with SIMATIC Manager C poea OOOO 1 Start SIMATIC Manager z Select a STEP 7 project or create a new STEP 7 project Choose the Paste gt Station gt SIMATIC OP option from the menu and enter a name for the ProTool project 4 Start ProTool by double clicking the ProTool project Then select the operating unit for the project Starting ProTool on a SIMATIC PC station If you install a WinAC PLC on a PC station on w
116. Africa Nuremberg Authorization Local time Mon Fri 8 00 to 17 00 Telephone 49 911 895 7200 Fax 49 911 895 7201 E Mail authorization nbgm siemens de GMT 1 00 America Johnson City Technical Support and Authorization Local time Mon Fri 8 00 to 19 00 Telephone 1 423 461 2522 Fax 1 423 461 2289 E Mail simatic hotline sea siemens com GMT 5 00 Asia Australia Singapore Technical Support and Authorization Local time Mon Fri 8 30 to 17 30 Telephone 65 740 7000 Fax 65 740 7001 E Mail simatic hotline sae siemens com sg GMT 8 00 The languages spoken by the SIMATIC Hotlines are generally German and English the Authorization Hotline is also provided in French Italian and Spanish User Manual ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Preface Release 12 02 SIMATIC Customer Support Online Services The SIMATIC Customer Support team offers you substantial additional information about SIMATIC products via its online services e General current information can be obtained Inthe Internet under http www siemens com simatic e Current Product Information leaflets FAQs Frequently Asked Questions Downloads Tips and Tricks can be obtained Inthe Internet under http www siemens com automation service amp support Training Center Siemens offers a number of training courses to familiarize you wi
117. B MP 270 or Panel PC 670 you can place icons on the screen for function keys having locally defined functions This is only possible however for the function keys arranged directly around the screen To find out how to assign keys globally or locally refer to the topic Function keys ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 15 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 Setting the display for the operating unit By choosing System gt Settings you can set how the compiled project will be displayed on the operating unit for PCs and SIMATIC Panel PCs for example You can start the project either in full screen mode or in a window that is smaller than the screen For full screen mode check the option Full Screen at Display In Full Screen mode more space is available to you even while you are configuring since the window frame is hidden Therefore set Full Screen mode as a matter of course before you start configuring if your target device supports this option ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 16 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 9 Configuration notes for touch devices Screen partitioning basics Before you start setting touch device controls set the basic partitioning of the screen on the operating unit Give consideration to where messages and input windows will be
118. C Example If tags are used for scaling trends and bar graphs the initial value may be the start value of the scaling Note It is not always possible to specify a start value for STRING type tags Setting limit values An upper and a lower limit value can be configured at Limit values for tags If the tag value is outside the defined range in other words it is higher or lower than the limit value concerned this has the following effect on the input fields for example If the operator enters a value outside the configured limit values the input is rejected and the original value is retained Configuring tags with functions You can assign functions to tags in input output fields for example the Select Screen Permanent function The function is triggered as soon as the value of the tag changes thus in our example the screen is selected ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 75 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 3 4 Updating tags Principle You ca update the tags in your project in different cycles So as not to place an unnecessary burden on system performance the update time must be set in an optimum manner The following applies to calculation of the update time Update time acquisition cycle plus transfer time plus processing time You achieve optimum update times by taking the following points into account while you are config
119. C PLC it is far simpler to configure ALARM_S messages for process diagnostics if you have installed S7 PDIAG What is ALARM_S ALARM_S is a message number procedure The message numbers are assigned by the system when you are configuring in SIMATIC STEP 7 or SIMOTION SCOUT The numbers are used as the basis for the specific assignment of the correct message text When a fault arises the operating unit receives a message containing the message number On the basis of the number the corresponding message text is identified and displayed The PLC stores not only the status of the message arrived departed acknowledged but also the time This information is retained after the messages have been sent too so individual network components for example operating units can log on later and update Types of ALARM_S messages The messages you can select at Alarm_S differ as follows e alarm messages e event messages e messages of Report System Error SFM type You can configure in SIMATIC STEP 7 or SIMOTION SCOUT whether an ALARM_S message needs to be acknowledged or not ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 133 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Configuring ALARM_S messages When configuring messages you can either enter simple unformatted text or make use of the facility for device specific message configuration Depending on the display unit in questi
120. EMP END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE ReadTime The PLC system time is read with SFC1 END_FUNCTION Note You can activate SFC1 in any program scan cycle The execution time depends on the CPU being used and can be taken from the CPU documentation As a rule of the thumb you can use 0 5 ms ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 52 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques ail Procedure 7 200 In the PLC program open the Display Time subroutine SBRO SUBROUTINE_BLOCK Display_Time SBRO BEGIN NETWORK 1 Time display on TP 170A as 1 STRING tag IVB 300 length 17 HOR Time display on TP 170A as 2 STRING tags I II TODR VB200 HTA VB202 VB300 2 MOVB 46 VB302 HTA VB201 VB303 2 MOVB 46 VB305 HTA VB200 VB306 2 MOVB 32 VB308 HTA VB203 VB309 2 MOVB 58 VB311 HTA VB204 VB312 2 MOVB 58 VB314 HTA VB205 VB315 2 END_SUBROUTINE_BLOCK Use the function Convert hexadecimal number to ASCII string to convert the time after it has been read out to an ASCII string Note You can activate SBR_0 in any program scan cycle The recommended setting for the acquisition cycle of the tag Date and Time Tag is 0 5 s ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 53 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Result The PLC system time is now displayed in the output field ProTool V6 0 Se
121. IMATIC S7 SIMATIC 505 and many PLCs from other manufacturers ProTool and SIMATIC STEP 7 ProTool can be integrated in the SIMATIC STEP 7 configuration software thus allowing you to select SIMATIC STEP 7 symbols and data blocks as tags in ProTool This not only saves you time and money but also eliminates the possibility of errors made when entering the same data several times You can use ProTool as a stand alone application or integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 In this documentation attention is drawn at appropriate points to the fact that the procedures for the two configuration differ You fill find more information about the configuration of ProTool with SIMATIC STEP 7 at the topic Configuring with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Offline configuration With ProTool you create and edit your projects offline The device need not yet be available at this time The configuration computer displays the configured project data as it will subsequently be displayed on the device On completion of configuration you can download the executable project file from the configuration computer to the device ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 1 3 Introducing ProTool Release 12 02 1 1 Overview of the documentation The SIMATIC HMI documentation is made up of a combination of manuals instructions and online Help in keeping with the range of target groups This chapter provide
122. K for Active G for Cleared Q for Acknowledged e Message text e Value of the message tag at the time of arrival or departure ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 127 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Example Below is an example of output from the message buffer to the operating unit No Time Date Status fre 0010 11 34 26 27 03 98 K Boiler pressure too high 12 7 bar off 0029 11 40 47 27 03 98 K Q Oil supply shut Off 0010 11 58 08 27 03 98 KQ G Boiler pressure too high 7 9 bar Note 0010 11 38 09 27 03 98 K Q Boiler pressure too high 12 7 bar If the new status of a message in the message buffer is not known for example when the CPU is overloaded or being updated after connection malfunctions only the message status prior to the update is shown in the message buffer such as GKQ ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 128 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 12 Communication areas for messages Communication area required for operating unit PLC communication For communication between the operating unit and the PLC to function properly establish an assignment to the following communication areas in the project window of your ProTool project at Area Pointers Event messages and or Alarm messages These areas are imperative if you
123. LC the operating mode must be changed to Offline to transfer a new project to Download mode e Switching languages Where projects involve several languages the service technician can set the language required by the actual installation when starting up or while the project is running e Display software version The Hotline needs the software version of the installed ProTool components to efficiently process your inquiries e Displaying Task Manager The service technician can change to other applications on the operating unit by using Task Manager e Opening Internet Explorer Using Internet Explorer the service technician can change from the world wide web from an operating unit Windows CE ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 19 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 11 Editing projects Useful functions when editing projects 4 20 If you edit projects in ProTool there are several ways in which you can make work easier for you Converting projects If you wish to create similar projects for different devices you can convert a project into a project for another destination device In this way you quickly create a basis for a new project In this instance it is possible for example to convert a project for graphics displays to a project for Windows based systems Copying objects You can copy previously created objects from one project to
124. LC might be lost This means that there is then no conenction between the STEP 7 symbols and ProTool tags either The following causes are possible for this 1 Reuse of a ProTool project in another STEP 7 project Note If the S7 CPU is copied together with the ProTool project within STEP 7 to a new STEP 7 project the connections are retained 2 Integration of a ProTool project into a STEP 7 project 3 Replacement of an S7 CPU in the STEP 7 project The CPU swop within STEP 7 HWCONFIG is not normally affected by this Note The ProTool tags concerned are reported in the output window when the project is opened Perform the following steps to restore the connections between ProTool tags and STEP 7 symbols Procedure In ProTool CS in the Properties dialog box connect the ProTool PLC to the corresponding STEP 7 CPU by means of the Parameters button When doing so you receive a message to the effect that the connection of the tag to the STEP 7 symbols has been restored In ProTool CS choose Edit gt Restore Symbols From then on the following cases are possible for the STEP 7 symbol used in the ProTool tag 1 A STEP 7 symbol that is used is present 2 A STEP 7 symbol that is used is present but the address in the S7 program is different 3 A STEP 7 symbol that is used is not present in the STEP 7 symbols but another STEP 7 symbol having the same address is present 4 A STEP 7 symbol
125. MA06 1AB0 7 9 7 10 Documenting and managing projects Release 12 02 E Procedure Enter the value you require for the right border at Right for example 3 for 3 cm If you like you can specify a piece of text here for the headers and footers at the same time Page HEI Margins in cm Left Right Top Bottom W W W W Cancel Header M y header Footer M y company a Confirm your input by clicking OK You are now back in the Reports dialog box 10 To modify the definition for the cover sheet select the entry Cover Sheet in the Contents list and click the Parameters button 11 In the Cover Sheet dialog box select the graphic called LOGO with your company logo at Graphic Click OK twice until you are back in the Print dialog box Finally click the OK button to activate the printing process You have now modified the definitions for the report called Complete The changes will be available in future when you print other projects ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Appendix Appendix A HMI System Messages B Abbreviations ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Appendix Release 12 02 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages
126. Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 38 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 Configuration techniques Here you will learn how to e Create screens e Use tags e Configure controls and display elements e Configure schedulers and trends e Create reports e Configure messages e Use functions e Create archives and recipes e Configuring operator prompting e Creating VB scripts e Configuring in foreign languages ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 1 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 1 Create screens Example Screens are an image of the process You can display processes on screens and specify process values The figure below shows an example of a mixing unit for producing different juices Ingredients are filled into a mixer from different tanks and then mixed The liquid levels in the tanks and in the mixer are displayed The intake valves can be opened and closed by means of the operating unit The motor for the mixer can be turned on and off in a similar manner Quantity in tank in 1 Tank 12 C Tank 3s I Tank 2 Bottling machine ______q Mixing unit Tank 1 Tank 2 Tank 3 o a oO Quantity in Valve 4 mixer I to bottling machine Soft key button Fixed window Example of a Screen Mixing Station Components of a screen A screen can consist of static and dynamic components Sta
127. Modify the operating unit address in the configuration in PLC 140015 Incorrect baud rate Correct the incorrect Or incorrect bus parameter e g HSA parameters Or OP address HSA Or incorrect interrupt vector interrupt does not arrive at the driver 140016 he CC Change the interrupt number 140017 ee Change the interrupt number 140018 The consistency check was deactivated Activate the consistency 140019 140020 150000 by Simotion Scout Only one appropriate note appears Simotion Scout loads a new project in the PLC Connection to the PLC is interrupted The version in the PLC and that in the configuration FWD file do not match Connection to the PLC is interrupted No more data is read or written Possible causes The cable is defective The PLC does not respond is defective etc check with Simotion Scout again and load the configuration in the project once more Wait until the end of the reconfiguration Remedy Load the current version in the PLC using Simotion Scout Generate the anew project using ProTool CS end ProTool RT and start with the new configuration Check that the cable is plugged in the PLC is operational the correct interface is used Reboot the system if the system message is displayed Connection is established via the wrong continuously interface The system is overloaded ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure
128. Note Do not configure too many scripts that have to be processed simultaneously since this can result in too severe constraints at run time If a maximum number of simultaneous or nested scripts is exceeded a corresponding error message is issued by ProTool during compilation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 232 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques No value assignment to script parameters Value assignments cannot be made to script parameters in a script If you pass a parameter to a script the value of the parameter is used in the script call by value However processing in the script does not change the input parameter The result of a script can be returned in two ways e The script is implemented as a function The result is returned by means of the value assignment to the function name of the script e The result of the script is assigned explicitly to a ProTool tag Unsuitable functions The VBScript functions MsgBox and InputBox cannot be used within ProTool ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 233 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 14 5 Examples of creating VBScripts These examples show a subroutine and a function of Visual Basic scripts 5 14 5 1 Example of a subroutine Objective A value in Fahrenheit is read from the PLC using ProTool tag Vvar_1 The value
129. PC 870 15 PC 870 15 TOUCH PC IL 70 12 TOUCH PC IL 70 15 TOUCH SINUMERIK Panels OP 010 OP 012 OP 015 SIMOTION Panels PC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Introducing ProTool SIMATIC MULTI PANEL Example MP 370 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 1 7 Introducing ProTool Release 12 02 1 1 3 ProTool for graphical displays Devices The ProTool Configuring Graphics Displays documentation tells you how to configure the following operating units e Graphics oriented operator panels OP 27 OP 37 e Touch panels TP 27 6 TP 27 10 TP 37 e C7 devices C7 626 OP 25 with integrated S7 CPU hd to Example TP 37 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 1 8 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Introducing ProTool 1 1 4 ProTool for text based displays Devices The ProTool Configuring Text Based Displays documentation tells you how to configure the following operating units e Text oriented operator panels OP 3 OP7 OP 17 e Text displays TD17 e C7 devices C7 621 OP 3 with integrated S7 CPU C7 623 OP 5 with integrated S7 CPU C7 624 OP 15 with integrated S7 CPU C7 633 OP 7 with integrated S7
130. PLC the changed value is available on the PLC When a value changes on the PLC the calculation of the reverse function takes place 1 Since VAR_2 has a connection to the PLC the value of VAR_2 changes 2 The function or script for converting from VAR_2 to VAR_1 is triggered by the value change event 3 The changed value of VAR_1 appears in the input output field on the operating unit Note In order to avoid any recursions functions are not executed at the value change event when the value of the tag changes as a result of another function The change to the VAR_2 tag thus does not cause an immediate change to VAR_1 which would result in an endless loop ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 10 6 Example of configuring a function This example shows you how to configure the Change Mode function with parameters so that Online and Offline modes can be set with function keys In addition the result of the operation will appear on the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 167 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 10 6 1 How to change the operating mode with a current display Objective The following example using the Change Mode function illustrates how you configure functions with parameters You also see how the res
131. ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 23 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 A 24 290024 Acknowledgement that downloading data records from the PLC to the operating unit has been completed without any errors 290025 Acknowledgement that downloading of data records from the PLC to the operating unit has been terminated due to an error 290026 An attempt has been made to read write a data record although the data mailbox is not free at present This error may occur in the case of recipes for which downloading with synchronization has been configured 290027 Noconnection to the PLC can be established at present Therefore the data record can neither be read nor written Possible causes No physical connection to the PLC no cable plugged in cable is defect or the PLC is switched off 290030 This message is issued after reselecting a screen that contains a recipe display in which a data record has already been selected 290031 While saving it was detected that a data record with the specified number already exists 290032 While exporting data records it was detected that a file with the specified name already exists 290033 Confirmation request before deleting data records Check the configuration have the tag addresses been set up in the PLC does the recipe number exist does the data record number exist
132. SIEMENS Preface Introducing ProTool Getting started in ProTool SIMATIC HMI ProTool integrated in ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 How to configure Windows Configuration techniques Creating and editing projects based systems esting projects gt J O o Gams m U N O a A WIN Documenting and managing User Manual ix Index gt O Ke G go lt oO oO 9 a on x lt Order number 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 A5E00183247 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to protect the product and connected equipment These notices are marked as follows according to the level of danger Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Caution used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury Caution used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may Attention indicates that unwanted events or status can occur if the relevant information is not observed Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product
133. SS The invalid part for the tag is assigned a default value when displayed ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 197 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 12 5 Synchronization with the PLC Purpose Usage With synchronous transfer both communication peers set status bits in the data mailbox used by them both In this way you can prevent uncontrolled mutual overwriting of data in your PLC program Synchronous data record transfer is then always available for example if e DThe PLC is the active peer in the transfer of data records e Information about the recipe number name and data record number name have to be evaluated on the PLC e A transfer of data records is initiated by a function or a PLC job for example with the functions Data_Record_DAT To PLC and Data_Record_ PLC _To_DAT or the PLC jobs Write Data_Record_To_ PLC and Read_Data_Record_From_PLC Note Greater flexibility is achieved by using functions rather than PLC jobs Requirements 5 198 If you want data records to be transferred between the operating unit and the PLC with synchronization the following requirements must be met during configuration e The Data Mailbox area pointer is created in the project window at Area pointer e The PLC with which the operating unit synchronizes the transfer of data records is specified in the recipe properties You set the PLC in t
134. Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 150001 160000 160001 160010 160011 160012 160013 160014 Connection is re established because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated No more data is read or written Possible causes The cable is defective The PLC does not respond is defective etc Connection is established via the wrong interface The system is overloaded Connection is re established because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated There is no connection to the server because the server identification CLS ID cannot be established Values cannot be read or written There is no connection to the server because the server identification CLS ID cannot be established Values cannot be read or written There is no connection to the server because the server identification CLS ID cannot be established Values cannot be read or written The specified server was started as InProc Server This has not been released and may possibly lead to incorrect behavior because the server is running in the same process area as the ProTool Pro RT runtime software Only one OPC server project can be started on a PC MP An error message appears when an attempt is made to start a second project The second project has no OPC server functionality and cannot be located as an OPC server from external sources Check that
135. aeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenas 5 9 7 Logging MESSAGES eeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeseaas 5 9 8 Displaying messages on the operating unit 5 9 9 Message VIEW eeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeenaneeeeeaas 5 9 10 Configuring message processing seecceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeenateeeenaes 5 9 11 Contents of message DUffErS ee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetaeeeeeenaeeeeeenas 5 9 12 Communication areas for MESSAGES eeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeteeaes 5 9 13 Message procedure eeeeeeeeeeceenneeeceeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 9 13 1 Message bit procedure 00 0 0 ceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 5 9 13 2 Message number procedure ALARM_G c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 5 9 13 3 Display classes for ALARM_S messages cecceeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeaes 5 9 13 4 Setting the message procedure and selecting the display classes 5 9 13 5 Incorporating ALARM_S messages ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeetennaeens 5 9 13 6 Updating the operating Unit eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 5 9 13 7 Resource consumption of MESSAGES ceeeeeetteeeeeetteteeeenaeeeeeenes 5 9 13 8 Communication sequence in the event of ALARM_S messages 5 9 13 9 Acknowledging ALARM_S messages cccceeeeeeseeneeeeeeneeeeteenaeees 5 9 13 10 Printing ALARM_S messages ec ceeeeceeeeee
136. al o imaa a Memory medium Display DB1DBWD 5 DB2DEW0 95 DB3DBWD 3 DB4DBvV0 100 Production can be controlled by means of one or more VB scripts which automatically transfer the production data records to the PLC The process can be monitored by means of return values of the functions being used Implementation in ProTool You can implement the automated production process with the available data record functions The function Import Data Record loads data records from a csv file to the data medium The function Data_Record DAT To PLC transfers a data record from the data medium to the PLC You will find more information about programming with VBScript at Creating VBScripts ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 211 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 13 Prompting the operator Purpose 5 212 In addition to the option of customizing the user interface of the operating unit to make it easier for you to use ProTool features other options for supporting and prompting you on your operating unit as a function of the situation This means you can implement mechanisms and decision making aids that can effectively prevent incorrect operations on the operating unit ProTool makes the following methods available for the implementation of operator prompting Providing Help text Displaying the on screen keyboard Assigning icons to loc
137. al Basic or VBA Bear in mind that VBScript does not offer the full scope of Visual Basic as a language In addition ProTool tags must be simulated by local VBScript tags As in any other program however programming errors may not appear until runtime These are displayed as system errors at script runtime preceded by VBScript Error The name of the script and the line number in which the error occurs are displayed Check criteria To avoid errors you should check your scripts for the following e Are direct or indirect recursions used correctly e Are there any continuous loops e Are the function parameters correct e Are the tag types used for the parameters correct e ls the number of parameters in a script correct e Are you using time consuming routines e Do you call the scripts very often To debug you use the function Display System Message Text This function allows you to check which program steps have been carried out Call the function in the script at the places where you would like to check the debugging session Transfer text or a value to the function It will be read out as a system message while the script is running The script can thus be processed step by step Note Only one script can be executed at any particular time ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 231 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 14 4 Constraints with VBSc
138. al array elements e They cannot be String type tags ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 73 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Configuring array tags 5 74 Configure array tags by entering the number of elements at least two in the Tag dialog box Acquisition Cycle s fi Number of Elements fi 0 Array element An array element in ProTool consists of an array tag with an associated index The individual elements can be specifically addressed by means of the index The index can be either a constant or a tag An array element is always attached to an object for example an input field Configuring an array element Configure an array element by opening the Properties dialog box for the desired object In the dialog box select Array element and then New In the Array Element dialog box select the array tag and the associated index and assign a name to the array element Name aR RAYELEM_1 E Array tag brw we cD ance Index new cI DI ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 3 Tag settings Setting a start value You can set a start value for the tag at Options When the project is downloaded the tag is assigned the start value The start value is displayed only on the operating unit and is not stored on the PL
139. al function keys Displaying and hiding screen objects Assigning dynamic attributes Driving light emitting diodes Configuring the tab order Dynamically positioning screen objects Assigning operator authorization ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 13 1 Help information on the operating unit Purpose Help text provides additional information and operator instructions on screens input and output fields and buttons and messages to the operator at run time Help text provides additional information that can be defined for screens input output fields buttons and messages when configuring with ProTool For example Help text may be in the form of the permissible range of values for an input field or the cause and elimination of a malfunction in the case of an alarm message Help text is displayed on the operating unit in the language you set You configure Help text on the Help Text tab in the Properties dialog box of the object in question In addition to Help text you can configure tooltips on some devices for certain screen objects the tooltips are displayed at run time for limit values in input fields for example Displaying Help text on the operating unit e All devices except PC The availability of Help text is indicated on the operating unit by the lit HELP LED On touch panels the HELP button is displayed Th
140. alled the following libraries are available to you in the Library directory Bmp Graphics lib Technical standard symbols Vector Graphics lib Pipes pumps All Windows systems tanks and valves except TP 170A TOUCH Switches lib All Windows systems especially for touch operated devices except TP 170A TP 170B Mobile Panel 170 TP 170A TOUCH Switches lib Buttons All Windows systems especially for touch operated devices such as TP 170A TP 170B Mobile Panel 170 TP 270 MP 270 TOUCH MP 370 TOUCH Note All objects in this library are displayed in gray tones TP 170B Color Touch Switches lib Buttons TP 170B TP 270 MP 270B TOUCH MP 370 TOUCH MP 370 15 TOUCH You can add further libraries to this directory yourself and then use them in ProTool Files must be of the lib type and have the same format as a ProTool library ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 10 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Managing libraries 3 As soon as you open a screen in a project you have access to the menu options under Edit gt Libraries and to the icon button Once you open the first library the library window on the screen is active The first library opened and all those subsequently opened are shown together here as a tree structure The following functions are available to assist you in managing your libraries e Adding a library
141. an area pointer You create area pointers in the project window at Area pointers You can edit area pointers with all the commands available in the shortcut menu for example copy and then paste in another project What area pointers are available The number of area pointers available varies depending on the selected operating unit For information on how large the area pointers should be when you create them and the structure they have to have refer to the Communication for Windows Based Systems user s manual The overview below lists the various area pointers and what they are used for The area pointers are sorted in alphabetical order User version The user version identifies the version of the project A version check is performed on the PLC by means of this area pointer Job mailbox The PLC uses this data area to transfer jobs to the operating unit in order to trigger specific functions to display a screen for example Event messages You can configure an event message for each bit in this data area The bits are assigned to the message numbers in ascending order As soon as the PLC sets a bit in this data area the operating unit recognizes that the assigned event message has arrived Conversely the operating unit interprets the message as departed after the bit is reset on the PLC Screen number In this data area the operating unit stores information on the current screen You can evaluate this informa
142. an no longer be served 320001 The network is too complex The defective operands cannot be displayed 320002 No diagnostics capable alarm messages have been selected The units related to the alarm messages could not be selected 320003 No alarm messages exist in respect of the selected unit No network can be displayed in the detail display 320004 The required signal statuses could not be read by the PLC The defective operands cannot be established 320005 The project contains ProAgent partitions which are not installed No ProAgent diagnostics can be performed 320014 The selected PLC cannot be evaluated for ProAgent The message display configured with the Evaluate_message_display_fault function could not be found Evaluate the additional system message related to this message which is also issued Repeat the print job if necessary Select the movements on the other display units and select the movement screen on the required display unit Display the network in AWL Select a diagnostics capable alarm message in the message screen ZP_ALARM Select the defective unit in the general view screen Check the consistency between the configuration on the display unit and the PLC program loaded In order to run the project install the ProAgent option packet Check the parameters of the Evaluate_message_display_f ault function ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to co
143. and improves the security of the system or machine In addition there is the option of the operator logging on and off the operating unit irrespective of a control For this there are the following globally configurable functions Write Password _To_ Tag The a user s password is written to a tag when a user logs on it can be announced to the PLC in this manner This means that certain permissions can be enabled on the PLC Report Password Change Login and logout operations on the operating unit can be traced in connection with an archiving function by means of this function Write Password Level To Tag The value of the current password level on the operating unit is written to a tag and made available to the PLC In this way user independent enabling of certain functions can be implemented Write User Name To Tag This function writes the current user name to a tag If the tag is connected to the PLC certain functions can be enabled on the PLC as a function of the user ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 14 Creating VB scripts Overview ProTool features an interface for scripting with Microsoft Visual Basic Script VBScript VBScript allows you to add your own functions to the ProTool configuration software All the data types operators and functions offered by VBScript are available Scripts which you created yourself i
144. another project You do not have to create the same objects twice when you edit several projects Undoing and redoing actions You can undo many of the actions performed in ProTool when for example you have entered a wrong value or have edited a screen object incorrectly Similarly you can redo actions you have undone Substituting a project and project parts To use an existing project say as a basis for a new project or to reuse previously configured parts of a project you can substitute whole projects in ProTool or only certain selectable project parts in a destination project ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 11 1 Convertible projects Windows based system gt Windows based system You can use menu command File gt Convert to convert a ProTool project that you created for a Windows based device to a project for a different Windows based device It is also possible within a device class to convert from one resolution to another or between different destination devices having different display sizes Note When you convert an existing configuration for another destination device close the converted configuration and open it again before you make changes Note Projects for the TP 170B Mono can be converted to a project for the TP 170B Color and the other way round You can cross convert p
145. anumeric values enter values of different formats directly on the operating unit You can also set limit values for the input or protect the input field by means of a password 23 Date Time With Date Time you can display and set the system time numerically Symbolic output field A symbolic output field shows text in place of a numerical value The assignment between the text and the values of the tags is configured in a text or graphic list text list or graphic list Example Instead of the values 0 and 1 you can output the texts Motor OFF and Motor ON on the operating unit Selection field In selection fields the operator selects a input field for symbolic block of text for the input from a text values list Example Instead of the values 0 and 1 the operator can select the text Motor OFF and Motor ON to control the motor Viewing a graphic With the graphic view you can dynamically position graphics from other graphics programs in your project Graphic list The graphics list shows a graphic from a list irrespective of the PLC status Example Instead of the values 0 and 1 you can display a graphic for a closed valve and a graphic for an open valve ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 6 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Screen Description object Selecting a graphic In graphics selection fields the operator selects a graphi
146. area pointer requires 6 DBW The first four DBWs are reserved for writing the PLC system time in the SIMATIC STEP 7 Date and Time format The remaining two DBWs are reserved The recommended acquisition cycle is 15s Apply the settings by clicking OK in each case E Project PROS pdb B S TP1704 PROS pdb Type No PLC Address Length Acquisit Messages Screens Date Time PLC DB2DBWO 6 15 0 Messages GJ Tags 8 Graphics Controllers aim Area Pointers 1 Object s 1 object s selected ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 63 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 I Procedure S7 300 or S7 400 The text or graphic list of the PLC program in ASCII It can be imported into the program 126 BZ_DB 126 CYCL_EXC 126 READ_CLK 126 ReadTime_FC 126 ReadTimeBZ 126 SET_CLK 126 TP_DB 126 WriteTime_FC Define the storage area on the PLC Data_Block TP_DB TITLE DB with Date and Time tags VERSION 1 0 BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK DATA_BLOCK BZ_DB TITLE DB for area pointer VERSION 1 0 BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK 7 300 or S7 400 Initiate FC3 in OB1 CALL ReadTimeBZ Enter the CPU system time in the memory area of the area pointer by initiating SFC FUNCTION ReadTimeBZ VOID TITLE enter system time in BZ VERSION 1 0 VAR_TEMP END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE END_FUNCTION ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User
147. ary states switch ON OFF valve OPEN CLOSED When using functions for editing tags bit by bit you must take the following points into consideration e As after the change is made ProTool writes the entire tag to the PLC and does not check whether the value in the PLC has changed in the meantime the PLC only has read access to the tag e Depending on the PLC the bits of a tag will either be counted from right to left or from left to right As you usually know to which PLC the tag is linked ProTool automatically scales your information to the requirements of the PLC However if you use functions to edit tags bit by bit in VBScripts the PLC to which the tag is connected is not known from the outset So in VBScripts the bits are always counted from right to left starting with 0 Functions You can use the following functions to set the individual bits of a tag Set Bit Changes the value of a can only be used for BOOL Reset Bit tag to TRUE or FALSE Set Reset Bit Set Bit in Tag Changes a bit from 0 to Usage for PLCs where there Reset Bit in Tag 1 or vice versa the are no tags of the BOOL Set Reset Bit in Tag entire tag is always type or to save memory in written to the PLC the PLC used for example to operate switches Set Bit on Pressing The bit remains set until Operating the traversing Key the key is released keys You will find an example of using these functions at the topic called Using bit operations fo
148. ase 12 02 Configuration techniques Display The example in the figure shows a slider for setting and displaying temperature values The current value here 50 is displayed in plain language and also as a bar graph 4 D S DB 150 100 60 No o NT a 20 Example referring to a slider Note To display numeric values in analog form you can also use the Analog Display screen object Note Because scaling is automatic it could happen that two intermediate scale marks will appear right next to each other looking like a wide intermediate mark To undo this effect make a minor adjustment to the length of the slider control You can also completely inhibit the scaling display Deviations between slider and tag In the cases that follow the value displayed on the slider might deviate from the actual value of the associated tag e The range configured for the slider minimum and maximum values do not correspond to the configured limit values for the slider tag e Aninvalid password is entered for a password protected slider ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 43 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 16 Analog display Purpose Settings 5 44 An analog display presents numerical values as a pointer instrument You can set up as many as three areas on the instrument dial each with different color backgro
149. ation techniques Acquisition cycle The acquisition cycle determines the time interval in which the value of a tag is updated on the operating unit e If 0 is entered for the acquisition cycle the tag is updated only when a screen is opened and then not updated any more until the screen is opened again e Ifa value gt 0 is entered for the acquisition cycle of a tag the tag is updated periodically in the specified time and also when the screen is opened The acquisition cycle is a multiple of the standard clock pulse which you configure for every PLC in the PLC dialog box You globally modify the acquisition cycles for all the tags of a project by setting the standard clock pulse System default setting Acquisition cycle 1 s Standard clock pulse Example Set the standard clock pulse in the PLC dialog box The standard clock pulse of the operating unit is the basic factor for the update rate which you can set by means of the acquisition cycle of the tag You globally modify the acquisition cycle for all the tags of a project by modifying the standard clock pulse System default setting Standard clock pulse 500 ms If you increase the standard clock pulse to 1000 ms the acquisition cycle for all tags is increased to 2 s In order not to overtax communication between the PLC and the operating unit the times you set for the standard clock pulse should not be too short This would mean that other processes such as the
150. ation techniques Release 12 02 Procedure Call the Text or graphic list status and create the list with the data Type Bit 0 Value 0 Text Online mode Value 1 Text Offline mode Text List AES List Status_mode Decimal Binar C aH x Cancel Value Text Online mode Offline mode Offline mode Reference gt gt Click OK to accept all the dialog box entries Result At run time the operator can use the two configured function keys to set the operating mode and read the current operating mode on the display ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 172 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 11 Create archives Windows based systems offer you the opportunity to archive process data in other words store them permanently and analyze them The following types of process data can be archived e Tagsin the Tags dialog box you define a trigger condition and the range of values for archiving the tag e Messages By choosing System gt Messages gt Settings you can define which messages will be archived e TrendsUse the Data Source tab in the Trend dialog box to set the archive from which the tags for displaying the trend will be read ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 173 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 11 1 Archiving process data Ar
151. be modified Check the time which is to be because an invalid value was entered set Incorrect separators may have been used rights to modify the system time to modify the system time Windows rejects the setting request from Windows NT administration user manager guidelines 70014 The system time could not be modified Check the time which is to be Possible causes set an impermissible time was transferred Under Windows NT The user executing ProTool Pro RT the Windows NT user has no user must be assigned the rights 70015 The system time could not be read because Windows rejects the reading function 70016 An attempt was made to select a screen Check the screen number in by means of a function or job This is not the function or job with the possible because the screen number screen numbers configured specified does not exist Refer the number to a Or a screen could not be generated due screen if necessary to insufficient system memory 70017 Date Time is not read from the area Change the address or set up pointer because the address set in the the address in the PLC PLC is either not available or has not been set up 70018 Acknowledgement that the password list has been successfully imported ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems A 4 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 70019 Acknowledgement that the password list has been succe
152. between the Asian languages offered in order to display a project You can only enter text in the displayed language however when the operating system has also been switched to the desired language Field length Field lengths depend on the width of the characters used With Asian character sets the number of configurable characters in fields can be reduced as a result of the double character width ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 254 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Testing projects 6 Testing projects Principle Once you have completed your entire project or self contained parts within it the test phase starts The following steps must be taken 1 Compile your project Your project is transformed into a file that is capable of running on the operating unit 2 Testing a project without PLC connection To test the project without a PLC you must install the simulation program Start the simulator by choosing File gt Test gt Start Simulator from the menu or click this icon Specify suitable values in the simulation table for testing the tags or area pointers The values in the simulation table are read by Runtime during the simulation and thus a PLC connection is simulated Testing a project with PLC connection If you have connected your configuration computer to a PLC and have installed ProTool Pro RT on the configuration computer you can test your project dire
153. bjective You want to convert an MP 370 project to a PC project Procedure C Posar O O OOOO S aa Open the existing MP 370 project Choose File gt Convert gt Settings from the menu In the Conversion Setting dialog box set whether the graphics should be smoothed anti aliasing and the resolution should be adapted to the destination device Select Convert resolution too if you wan to convert projects between devices of different screen resolution During conversion all screens will then be adapted to the resolution of the destination device Close the dialog box by clicking OK 4 Choose File gt Convert gt Start The Save As dialog box appears Enter a directory and a new name for the new project From the Device type list select the destination device for your conversion in this instance PC The list displays all available destination devices for the source project you want to convert Select the resolution of the destination device from the Resolution list Click Save The project is converted and opened in the project window ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 26 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 11 4 Copying objects Between projects and within a project Principle You can cut or copy selected parts of your project and paste them from one project to another via the Clipboard For example you
154. bjects present in the source project as to whether an object having the same name is already present in the destination project If there is no such object present a new object is created with the name used in the source file If the object is already present in the destination project it will be replaced by the object in the source project Object linking is not changed by the substitution merely the contents of the object are inserted and additional linking added Should errors occur in the project during the substitution operation they are reported in the same way as other errors when the project is compiled Note PLCs and permanent windows are not replaced Replacing objects 4 30 You ca also copy individual project objects from a source project and paste them in another project with the Insert Replace function e By choosing Edit gt Copy you copy as many objects you like from the source project to the Clipboard e Choose Edit gt Insert Replace from the menu all objects in the destination project having the same name are replaced The replacement of individual objects and their linked referenced objects can be customized in a settings dialog box This dialog box is displayed for every Replace action ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects Example In the dialog box you set which objects
155. by selecting the symbol illustrated Bar graphs are linked to the PLC by means of a tag Apart from this tag which contains the value that is required to be displayed you can define other tags in order for example to visualize when a limit value has been reached or to display or hide the bar field You can freely define the direction scaling bar and background color and also labeling of the Y axis In addition you can show limit value lines to indicate limit values The following figure shows a bar that is updated vertically and has limit value lines drawn on it 100 Example referring to a bar graph ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 31 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 9 State areas Purpose Response The state area is a display element Depending on the configuration you can configure a warning indicator signal the status of a unit of equipment than cannot be seen from the operating unit such as a motor or configure a light indicator whose color changes or flashes as a function of the status concerned BO You create state areas by selecting the symbol shown or by choosing Insert gt State Area from the menu You can configure the response of the state area Select one of the following types for this e One state A state area can only display one state such as a warning or tip for example e Two states The state area has
156. c for the input from a graphics list Example With a graphics selection list you can design the user interface independently of any language for example Button Buttons are objects that trigger configurable functions by clicking a mouse or using a touch sensitive screen Buttons can be freely assigned a graphic or a block of text Status button The status button is used to input and display two states ON and OFF or Pressed and Not pressed You can configure it with or without latching State area The status area is a display element Depending on the configuration you can configure a warning indication or read out the status of a unit of equipment that cannot be seen from the operating unit such as a motor Switches The switch is used to input and output a binary status It can only be switched on or switched off Invisible button With invisible buttons their contours are not visible The button can for example be placed over a graphic to allow indirect operation of graphic elements You trigger configurable functions by touching an invisible button Trend view You can present several trends representing value histories simultaneously in trend view The axes of the trend view can be configured scales units etc Bar graph Bar graphs display a value from the PLC as arectangle You can use it to display fill levels for example Message view In the message view the operator can visualize selected messag
157. ce Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 6 Translate the pieces of text If you want to enter blocks of text in a foreign language switch the editing language choose Edit gt Language gt Select from the menu You select the language in which you have created the project to be your reference language likewise option Edit gt Language gt Select You can now have reference language text displayed and enter the text in the editing language If you want to send text for translation you can export it in csv format choose Edit gt Language gt Export on the menu After being translated external to ProTool you can accept them into your project choose Edit gt Language gt Import from the menu 7 Select the languages to be downloaded to a specific operating unit choose System gt Language Assignment from the menu You can select up to five languages simultaneously Compile the project Download the project to the operating unit Note Avoid moving fields in event messages and alarm messages when you modify a project that has been created in several languages Since there is no permanent assignment between the field and its position within the text you should move the pieces of text if necessary instead of the fields ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems
158. ce there is no cleared message event for diagnostic events and system messages they are treated as queued messages as long as they are set at System gt Messages gt System Messages e The contents of a selected message archive You can combine the display of messages and message events from the following message classes e Alarm messages e Event messages e HMI system messages e Diagnostic events SI Configure the message view by selecting the symbol illustrated Note You can enable the message view while you are configuring by using SHIFT and double click or from the Edit option of the shortcut menu In active mode you can drag and drop a column to the required position and set the column width during the configuration phase ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Operating a message view You can display the following buttons for operating a message view on the operating unit e ACK to acknowledge alarm messages e Help to display Help text e Edit to trigger functions The different columns can be hidden or shown whatever you want and edited like a table on the operating unit for example e Arrange column order e Set column width e Sorting columns in ascending and descending order possible only with the columns Date and Time Note When you change the system language to En
159. ces the size of the area available for screens The size of the fixed window can be changed but its position is always the same at the top of the screen The fixed window is configured with the Screens editor Message indicator The message indicator is a symbol indicating alarm messages that are still applicable on the operating unit You can enable and disable the message indicator by choosing System gt Screen Keys You cannot change the size but you can the position The message indicator can be used with touch devices Message area Icons The message area is the area in which messages are displayed on the operating unit By choosing System gt Screen Keys you can set separately for alarm and event messages whether they are displayed on the message line or in a message window or whether they are not displayed at all e Message line A configured message line is always present irrespective of the screen that has been selected It shows the most recent message to arrive e Message window If one of the display modes Window Window Window Line or Window Off is configured the message window for alarm messages is automatically opened as soon as an alarm message arrives To open the message window for event messages by means of an operator input in your project the function Display Event Message Window must be linked to a control On SIMATIC HMI operating units having an integrated keyboard for example the OP 170
160. chive Archive response in Runtime If the archives are activated after a cold restart power OFF ON of the Panel before the network connection has been established an initialization error is reported Therefore configure in your ProTool project an operating option whereby you can manually open the archives in Runtime such as a button for the function Open_Archives ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 176 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 11 2 Settings for an archive Settings When creating an archive you can choose the response for a full archive in the Properties dialog box on the Settings tab e FIFO buffer e Creating sequence archives Short term archive A short term archive is a FIFO buffer which means that if the buffer has a capacity of 100 for example only the last 100 values are archived Older values are overwritten Note On performance grounds it will always be possible to read at least 80 of the values from the buffer Therefore if you want to have a certain number of values available say 100 values you should be sure to create a FIFO archive which is larger say 125 values Sequence archive A sequence archive is filled to the defined size The data medium or archive then has to be changed in order to continue archiving You can select one of the following options for sequence archives e Automatically
161. chive properties The properties of an archive such as its storage location etc are defined in the Archive dialog box The Archive dialog box appears when a new archive is created in the project window or an existing archive is opened Archiving model The following diagram shows the archiving model Prozess data Archives storage medium E Taa1 EA mw S 5 Taa3 a on N a Message event we Database gt messone ovont z s MEE amp Message event Trend 1 Biwi gt a ro Trend 2 Database Archiving model Storage media The data can be archived on different storage media e File e Database not for Multi Panel ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 174 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Storage locations for archives Depending on the hardware configuration of the operating unit you can configure the following storage locations in ProTool CS e Storage Card PC Card e Storage Card2 CF Card e Network path when a network is created on an operating unit Note When creating archives on the CF card make sure it is inserted If not the data will be stored in the RAM file system of Windows CE and are lost on power down Storing data to file Each archive is stored as a separate file You must specify a path at Storage location If you are creating an archive but you either enter nothing at Path Name
162. ck the user defined bus profile Check the connection and whether the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PU PC interface Restart the system Check the connection and whether the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PU PC interface Restart the system Re install the module in the Control Panel using Set PU PC interface Switch the PLC on DPIT If only one master is connected to the network deactivate the option Is not active as the only master in Set PU PC interface If the network has more than one master switch this master on Do not modify any settings here otherwise a bus fault may occur Check the connection and that the communication peer is switched on ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 11 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 140012 There is an initialization problem e g Restart the operating unit when ProTool Pro RT has been Or start ProTool Pro RT first terminated in the Task Manager and then the other Or another application e g STEP7 applications WINCC is active with different bus parameters and the driver cannot be started with the new bus parameters e g baud rate 140013 The MPI cable is not plugged in and Check the connections thus there is no power supply 140014
163. components can be displayed for example details of the error location on the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 3 Message properties Configurable properties You can configure the following parameters for messages e Acknowledgement group e Print e Functions The window for configuring the properties opens automatically when a message class is opened from the project window Acknowledgement group Alarm messages can be assigned to acknowledgement groups Configure the assignment to an acknowledgement group for every single message If the operator acknowledges an alarm message in an acknowledgement group all the alarm messages in that group are acknowledged simultaneously group acknowledgement Print If you select Print the message event active cleared acknowledged is logged automatically on the printer if you selected Print ON at System gt Messages gt Settings Configure printing in the Attributes dialog box for every single message If you archive messages you can print the messages stored in an archive Functions You can configure one or more functions for the events Active Cleared Acknowledged and Edit Message e The Edit Message event can only be triggered by the operator by pressing the Process button e The message acknowledged event can be triggered by the s
164. ct into the current screen and edit it You can integrate suitable screen objects from a screen to a library Note a Under the illustrated object there are other pre configured screen objects for Windows CE devices Panel PCs and standard PCs in the SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library Vector graphics A vector graphic is a rectangle or a line for example You will find an overview of objects for vector graphics in the topic Vector Graphic Elements Available screen objects The following table contains you short descriptions of the most important screen objects Not all the screen objects listed here are necessarily available for every destination device C object Graphics With the graphic field you can use graphics from other graphics programs in your project A Text You can configure static texts with the text box Various formats are available You can display text in different fonts enter several lines of text and align it vertically or horizontally ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 5 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Screen Description my Output field With the output field you can display process values directly Different display formats for example decimal and binary are possible Output fields can be formatted such as 3D effects colors flashing etc Input field With the input field the operator can for alph
165. cters you obtain an error message during compilation to the effect that the maximum number of characters has been exceeded At the same time a list of the most infrequently used characters in the project is output Special characters Messages Special characters are ASCII characters higher than 127 for example a a If you use a non Chinese character set in text in an Asian Windows system you should not configure any special characters because they are not displayed correctly in a large number of cases Note The following applies to Windows CE devices Only West European characters must be entered for Asian languages as titles for message windows lines and buffers Other characters are not displayed on Windows CE devices Note If you enter Asian characters in English text in a multi language project that includes Asian languages they will not be displayed on these Windows CE devices All system messages are also available in Asian languages Message number message status active cleared acknowledged date time and acknowledgement group remain in alphanumeric characters in Asian projects and cannot be displayed in Asian characters ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 253 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Switching between Asian languages under Windows 2000 With language support installed in Windows 2000 you can switch
166. ctly in ProTool Pro RT You then get an exact simulation of the destination device 3 Choose File gt Test gt Start Runtime from the menu or click this icon al Download the project The project is copied to the directory from which it will be started This directory might be on the configuration computer or on the operating unit Should you find other errors in the project troubleshoot them and start again at step 1 Note If you are using a SIMATIC S5 or S7 configure Status Force in order to test specific tags in the PLC program Note If you configure with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 you can simulate a PLC connection with PLCSIM The S7 PLCSIM cannot be used in conjunction with the PC station of STEP7 however For further information please consult your SIMATIC STEP 7 documentation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 6 1 Testing projects Release 12 02 6 1 The Windows CE Control Panel Principle 6 2 Note The functionality available for the Windows CE Control Panel depends on the device For detailed information about the Windows CE Control Panel please refer to the equipment manual of the operating unit concerned The Windows CE Control Panel is only available on operating units running under the Windows CE operating system Using the Windows CE Control Panels service personnel can perform tasks such as the f
167. d the variable parameters are being correctly provided at the operating unit Modify the function Copy_archive in the project if necessary Before initiating the function delete the target archive Configure Storage Card as the memory location or a network path ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 7 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 80028 80029 80030 80032 110000 110001 110002 110003 110004 A 8 The message serves as a status acknowledgment that initialization of the archives is currently running No values are archived until system message 80026 is issued The number of archives specified in the message could not be initialized Initialization of the archives has been completed The faulty archives are not available for archiving jobs The structure of the table s available does not match the archiving structure expected The archiving process is stopped for this archive Archives can be configured with a function trigger This is triggered as son as the archive is full If runtime is started and the archive is already full the trigger function will not be initiated The archive specified no longer archives data since it is full The operating mode status has been changed The operating mode is now offline The operating mode status has been changed The operating mode is now online The op
168. d from the PLC for each time unit clock pulse and added to the trend displayed on the operating unit Real time trends are suitable for displaying slow continuous patterns e Pattern trend With a pattern trend all trend values are read simultaneously from the PLC and displayed as a trend on the operating unit by setting a trigger bit Pattern trends are suitable for displaying rapid changes if the trend variation seen in its entirety profile is more interesting than individual values Trigger The trigger type defines how trend data is read in e Clock trigger time triggered In the case of a clock trigger the data that has to be acquired in the trend is read from the PLC in a fixed adjustable time slot To do this select Read Continuously on the Options tab when configuring the tag If the configured number of samples has been reached the oldest value is overwritten by every new one By means of the specified time slot and the number of samples you want to have displayed you set the period of time that has to be covered by the trend data This type of trigger is suitable for real time trends e Bit trigger event triggered In the case of a bit trigger data to be acquired on a trend is read in on an event triggered basis The event is triggered by the PLC as a result of setting a defined bit There are two possibilities of reading in trend data Single value acquisition Only one value is read from the PLC every time a b
169. d on the operating unit Message classes in ProTool Event messages Display routine operating and process states and processes Alarm messages Display critical or hazardous operating and process states and require operating personnel to react by issuing an acknowledgement or by processing System messages Display states and faults of the operating unit the PLC or the communication between them They are issued by the operating unit HMI system messages or by the PLC system messages Configuring SIMATIC S7 300 400 messages S7 system messages Display error states on the PLC or during communication with the PLC They are initiated by the PLC and can be displayed on the operating unit ALARM_S messages Are configured in SIMATIC STEP 7 Should an error occur the operating unit receives a message containing the message number and from this number the corresponding message text is determined and read out Diagnostic events Are entered in the S7 CPU diagnostic buffer and can be displayed on the operating unit Their purpose is to provide above all information on quicker and easier retrieval and troubleshooting ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 111 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Displaying messages from SIMOTION CPUs ALARM_S messages Are configured in SIMOTION SCOUT Should an error occur the operating unit receives a message containing the
170. d on the operating unit If the PLC program now sets both the bits assigned to the trends and the trend communication bit in the trend transfer area the operating unit detects the trigger It resets the trend bits and the trend communication bit and depending on the configuration reads out one value or the entire buffer As soon as the conditions for a new trigger have been met the PLC program sets the trend bits and the trend communication bit again Once the screen has been deselected the operating unit resets the bits set in the trend request area Define the trend request area and trend transfer area in the project window at Area pointers You will find a description of these data areas in the Communication Manual Note The position of the communication bit in the trend transfer area depends on the PLC you set Do not use this bit for the identification of bit triggered trends ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 2 8 Bar graph Purpose Settings A bar graph is a dynamic display element Bar graphs display a value from the PLC as a rectangular area This means that you can tell at a glance on the operating unit how far the current value is from the limits or whether a specified setpoint has been reached Bar graphs can be used to display fill levels or quantities for example Configure bar graphs
171. dating taQS jeciseceeeitiseeiacut AR 5 3 5 Address multiplexing ccccccccseececeeseeeeceenenneceeneeaeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeaes 5 3 6 Multiplexing taQ ve cieecicieeiciccteetica a eitedetaed Geiteeetaeetaen ieee 5 3 7 APCHIVING TAGS vcectetenececi2eveceiats desde s neetassente Gil sieetal A eee 5 3 8 Functions to Change tags accasarsi en 5 3 9 Functions to set tags bit by Dit cece ee eeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 3 10 Functions to change the value Of a taQ eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeenteeeeeeaas 5 3 11 Functions for the linear scaling Of tags ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeaes 5 3 12 Examples of configuring taQS ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeseeneeeeeeneeeeeeaas 5 3 12 1 How to configure a multiplex tag address multiplexing 5 3 12 2 Structure of an archive for taQs ecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeenneeeeetees 5 3 13 Details ON configuring TAGS cece eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenas 5 3 13 1 Saving STRING TAGS reap a pha aaa S 5 3 13 2 Decimal places With taQS sssiserriiinserauiidranindinraaianneranidan nandien ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1ABO Release 12 02 Contents 5 3 13 3 Address and type Of a tag i ceeecceeeceeeeeeeeteeeeseneeeeeseneeeeeteeeeerenaeeeeees 5 4 Creating text or graphic lists 2 0 eee cece ee eeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 5 5 Creating graphics and text eceeeceeee
172. dedacenceduaasadectagaccecbagenceedandencs 6 6 6 4 Simulation of the project with the simulator ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereets 6 5 Uploading projects i ic cossi oc ceeet ce eeeke ds cencal odeed cc cece piven aida coed deg elie cas 6 6 Directly accessing values on the PLC Status Force tag 6 7 Troubleshooting sn aee E EA ages 6 13 6 7 1 Error messages during compilation eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteenaees 6 13 6 7 2 Error messages while downloading ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeees 7 Documenting and managing projects seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 1 Printing project data wi cc i j cccstecdtdieeecdetiac a ree 7 2 Project management with integrated operation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee f 3 7 3 Managing projects in stand alone operation 0 cceeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 7 4 Constraints with printing cece seer ee seeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneaeeeeeenaees L 7 7 5 Example of documenting a project ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeestteeeeetneeeeees 7 5 1 How to create a customized printout eccceececeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeennaees Appendix A HMI System Message c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B ABDC Vint Ons cecces ees cree ese tea eae ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Contents Release 12 02 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Window
173. des an overview of how the keys are mapped to each other when a project is converted for another operating unit Examples You have configured a function on F20 on the MP 270 following conversion this function is triggered with F8 on an MP 370 and with SHIFT F8 on a standard PC If you have used F15 for a F145 project this function is no longer available on a standard PC following conversion Note When converting in ProTool CS the keys are imaged on each other irrespective of the key code MP 370 MP 270 OP 270 6 Standard PC PC 670 PC 870 OP 37 Pro OP 170B FI 25 Fl 45 MP 270B PO 12K P0 15K OP 270 10 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 23 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 MP 370 MP 270 OP 270 6 PC 670 PC 870 OP 37 Pro OP 170B FI 25 Fl 45 MP 270B PO 12K P0 15K OP 270 10 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 24 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects MP 370 MP 270 OP 270 6 Standard PC PC 670 PC 870 OP 37 Pro OP 170B FI 25 Fl 45 MP 270B PO 12K P0 15K OP 270 10 ENTER ENTER ENTER fs PAGE UP PAGE UP PAGE UP o PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN o ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 25 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 11 3 Example of how to convert an MP 370 project O
174. dialog box Activate address multiplexing Enter Multiplex _1 as the name of the new multiplex tag 7 g loick this button to define the multiplex tag On the address tab select BYTE at Type and enter the address F W 20 g The multiplex tag can assume values between 0 and 255 in other words you can reference 256 different addresses with the tag Variable_1 Apply the settings by clicking OK Note If you want to make use of the maximum range of values of the multiplex tag DB 50 in the STEP 7 program has to be created with at least 128 data words ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 85 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Result The name of the multiplex tag is displayed as the address of the tag Variable 1 DB 50 DBB MULTIPLEX 1 Variable_1 DB 50 DEBE mux Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Multiplex_1 mw 20 I Byte n Example configuring a multiplex tag ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 86 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 12 2 Structure of an archive for tags Structure Here is an example of a file for tags VarName TimeString VarValue Validity Time_ms Var_107 01 04 98 11 02 52 66 00 1 35886460322 81 Var_108 01 04 98 11 02 55 60 00 1 35886460358 73 Var_109 01 04 98 11 02 57 59 00 1 35886460381 22 Th
175. dialog box for the SIMATIC S7 The available data types and data formats depend on the PLC you selected You select it at Type or Format in the Tag dialog box Updating tags Section A The acquisition cycle determines the time interval in which the value of a tag is updated on the operating unit e If0 is entered for the acquisition cycle the tag is updated only when a screen is opened and then not updated any more until the screen is opened again e Ifa value gt 0 is entered for the acquisition cycle of a tag the tag is updated periodically in the specified time and also when the screen is opened The acquisition cycle is a multiple of the standard clock pulse which you configure for every PLC in the PLC dialog box You globally modify the acquisition cycles for all the tags of a project by setting the standard clock pulse ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 71 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Array tags An array tag represents a number of tags of the same type with consecutive memory addresses If you wish to define an array tag enter the number of elements in the array in the Tag dialog box at Number of elements The system default setting is 1 in other words the tag is not defined as an array Application example You can use array tags for history trends for instance Address Section B The address determines the memory loca
176. dynamic display and controls Vector graphic elements can be dynamically modified in other words their position can be dynamically changed at run time Selecting vector graphic elements 5 98 You can select the following drawing tools for creating simple vector graphics from the Screen Elements toolbar N eee amp Line You use this tool to draw different types of line You can set the color width type and ends of a line This means for example that you can draw continuous or dashed lines with squared rounded or arrow shaped ends Polyline You use this tool to draw open polylines and polygons You can set the color width and type of a line With polygons you can also specify the fill in color Ellipse circle You use this tool to draw ellipses and circles You can set the color width and type of a line and the fill in color Rectangle square You use this tool to draw rectangles and squares You can set the color width and type of a line and the fill in color Rounded edge rectangle and square You use this tool to draw rectangles and squares having rounded edges You can set the color width and type of a line the fill in color and radius of the rounded edges ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 6 Creating trends Usage e Real time trend With a realtime trend only one trend value at a time is rea
177. e material on the Clipboard in your ProTool configuration by choosing Edit gt Paste from the menu ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 94 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Optimum color presentation on the operating unit This setting is only available when you create projects for devices with Windows CE because these operating units only support 256 colors If the depth of color of the configuration computer is set to a value greater than 256 colors you can choose between the following settings when inserting graphics in your project in order to achieve optimum color presentation on the operating unit e Pattern with error scatter system default setting The colors of the screen are mixed to create different types of shading in this manner e Similar color The individual screen colors are replaced by a new color from the system colors which comes closest to the original color of the destination device To obtain optimum results use the Similar color setting in vector graphics and the system default setting Pattern with error scatter for color photographs Smooth display If the Smooth setting is enabled an anti alias filter for replacing missing pixels due to interpolation is used when increasing or decreasing the size of a graphic This setting results in softer transitions in photo realistic displays In the case of drawings the display
178. e PLC acknowledges the message to confirm that note has been taken of the message The message events have been acquired by the operating unit and time stamped The operating unit automatically enters all message events in the message buffer In this way the message events can be viewed at a later time again Communication areas for messages The display of messages on the operating unit is initiated by the PLC by a bit being set on it in a defined communication area ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 131 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 You can see which communication areas for messages have to be created on the PLC in the following figure Operating unit PLC 000x message Event message area Alarm message area Message buffer Printer Displaying messages ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 132 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 13 2 Message number procedure ALARM_S Overview In this section you will learn how ALARM_S differs from the message bit procedure and how the system behaves in the event of critical bottlenecks Requirements The display of ALARM_S messages on the operating unit can be configured only if you have integrated ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 and the PLC you are using is a SIMATIC S7 300 or a SIMATIC S7 400 or a SIMOTION Note For a SIMATI
179. e Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 8 2 Printing recipes in a report Purpose The data records of one or more recipes are read out to a report Note A Recipe Printout is always the last object to appear on a page you cannot insert any more objects after it on the page The Recipe Printout is always read out in its entirety if the page on which the Recipe Printout was configured is not sufficient follow on pages are printed automatically Note There are no PLC specific formats in a Recipe Printout just standardized tags types such as REAL INT etc To read out recipes to a report paste the illustrated Recipe Printout symbol to the report editor Properties of Recipe Printout You set the contents and appearance of a report on the tabs of the Recipe Printout dialog box e Recipes Here you set whether you want data records to be read out from a recipe or a range of recipes or whether you want all recipes to read out e Data records Here you set whether you want just one data record or a range of data records to be read out or whether you want all data records of the selected recipe s to be read out e Columns Here you set the appearance of the printout For this purpose you can select data whether you want to have explanatory titles and borders to be displayed and whether selected data should be read out by rows or by columns e Font Colo
180. e a completed project with you ona Notebook computer or a PU to a machine on site In this case you can unintegrate an integrated project and work with it as a stand alone project in ProTool The data of the PLC programming in SIMATIC STEP 7 are then no longer available Conversely you can re integrate a project which you edited as a stand alone project Note When you open a stand alone project there can no longer be automatic synchronization of the database between SIMATIC STEP 7 and ProTool You therefore have to ensure that the shared database is resynchronized for example by re integrating if changes are made to the STEP 7 program Integrating a project O Preeae O O O OOOO ti Open ProTool Choose File gt Integrate from the menu Enter the directory or the name of the pdb file that you would like to integrated Connect a PLC in ProTool to the corresponding CPU in SIMATIC STEP 7 The project is integrated and the connection of the tag to the symbols of the PLC can be established by choosing Edit gt Restore Symbols Copying a project from STEP 7 Oproer OOOO Open the project in ProTool Select the menu item File gt Copy from STEP 7 project Enter a directory and filename The configuration is saved as pdb file You can copy and move it in the same way as any other file ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 3 9 ProTool int
181. e archives configured for it are filled or the archive is written again FIFO Buffer option With the aid of the ProTool functions you are able to customize the way in which your project is archived Application examples for this include e The operator can perform unscheduled archiving of messages and tags e The operator can change the archive at any time he wants e Additional functions are executed when a sequence archive starts e A message archive ora tag archive is displayed on the operating unit e The archive data are stored in a database and processed further e The archive file is copied and processed further in another program ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 179 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 11 5 Examples of using archives These examples illustrate how to e Create and structure an archive for messages e Structure an archive for tags e Display archive data with a time window 5 11 5 1 How to create an archive for messages Objective You want to create archives for messages each having a size of 300 entries Procedure Procedure Double click the Archives object type in the project window to open the Archive dialog box On the General tab select Messages At Behavior at Restart select Reset Archive This means that in the event of a restart the archive will be written from the beginning again Select
182. e buffer or a message archive will be printed in a report Note Message Printout is always the last object to appear on a page you cannot insert any more objects after it on the page Messages are always printed in their entirety if the page on which the message printout was configured is not sufficient follow on pages are printed automatically To output the contents of the message buffer or of a message archive in a report paste the illustrated Message Printout symbol in the report editor Properties of Message Printout 5 106 You set the contents and appearance of a report on the tabs of the Message Printout dialog box e Messages Here you set whether you want to log current messages or messages from an archive select the type of message that you want to print and set the number of lines per message e Filter Here you configure the tags for the time stamp that set the range of messages from and to you want to include in the report e Columns Here you set the columns you want to have output The default value is the output of all columns apart from the diagnostic capability of a message and the of the PLC from which the message originates Further you set the sort order and display of the columns e Font Color Position Here you define the appearance of the message printout e Name You can use this name to identify the message printout ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configur
183. e configured Help text can be output by pressing the HELP key Detailed information about activating Help texts is given in the equipment manual for your operating unit e PCs Assign the function Show Help Text to function key F1 for example By pressing that key the operator can output the configured Help text at run time Note The function Display_Help_Text normally only makes sense with the function keys When you operate a function key you receive help on the screen object for which the focus is currently activated If you configure the Display_Help_Text function for a button you get either the configured Help for the button or for the current screen when you operate the button by clicking the mouse or by touch operation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 213 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 13 2 On screen keyboard Requirements Purpose The on screen keyboard can be enabled on all operating units except the OP 170B An on screen keyboard can be displayed for entering values on the operating unit The operator can click the illustrated keys with the mouse or with touch operated devices or touch them to fill out the input field Depending on the selected input field the on screen keyboard features keys for purely numerical input or for entering alphanumeric characters In the case of numeric input fields the operator is shown
184. e copied function key properties to the second function key 13 Click the second function key and change the value to 1 in the Parameters dialog box of the Operating mode parameter Replace the function Set Bit with the function Reset Bit with the tag Operating Mode In the next step you create an output field whose contents change dynamically depending on the Operating mode tag The user can thus read on the operating unit at any time which operating mode is currently set ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 170 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Configure the display O presare OOOO OS 1 Insert a symbolic output field in the screen The Symbolic Output Field dialog box appears 2 On the General tab at Display choose at Index tag the previously created Operating mode tag 3 Click the arrow pointing to the right next to Text or Graphic List and choose the New menu command from the shortcut menu that appears Symbolic output field 21 x General Font Color Attributes Position Enable r Display Symbolliste No List gt e lase New Edit Rename Feldlange Duplicate Indexvariable Mode hd BED Delete m Alignment Left C Center C Bight The Text or Graphic List dialog box appears ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 171 Configur
185. e event Note Do not operate several function keys or soft keys or buttons simultaneously Unintended actions might be initiated otherwise Invisible buttons 5 34 Invisible buttons are transparent buttons that are not displayed upon the operating unit If you place invisible buttons on graphics you can operate parts of the graphic for example a motor or a valve aj You create invisible buttons on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the button shown If you use invisible buttons in your project you should enable the display of invisible buttons while configuring by means of the illustrated button in the toolbar ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 2 11 State buttons Purpose Response The state button is a control and display element with two states pressed and released State buttons can signal the status of a unit that is not visible from the operating unit for example a motor This means that you can simultaneously change the status of the unit on your operating unit a State buttons are created on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the illustrated button or by choosing Insert gt State Button from the menu You can configure the response of the state button Select one of the following types for this e Switch The switch has two stable
186. e following is entered in the various columns VarName Name of the ProTool tag TimeString Time stamp as a string that is in a readable date format VarValue Value of the tag Validity Validity 1 value is valid 0 error has occurred Time_ms Time stamp as decimal value Converted required only for displaying the tag values as a trend Note on converting values in the Time_ms column If you wish to process a value in another program it must be divided by 1 000 000 Example 36343476928 1 000 000 36343 476928 A date from 31 12 1899 onward is derived by calculation from the value before the decimal point The time is derived from the value following the decimal point 0 476928 Multiply by 24 to give the hours multiply any remainder by 60 to give the minutes again multiply any remainder by 60 to give the seconds any further remainder multiplied by 1000 gives milliseconds Result 07 02 1999 11 26 46 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 87 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 3 13 Details on configuring tags At Details you will find more information on the subject of tags 5 3 13 1 Saving STRING tags ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 5 88 The STRING data type contains a length identifier in the first few bytes in addition to the test information This data type is compatible with STEP 7 and is used when you are working with ProTool
187. e object to be copied refers to a screen that does not exist in the destination project the underlying screen is not copied instead a blank screen is created as a dummy if the destination project does not contain a screen that can be reused This ensures that you will not copy the complete source project by mistake along with the start screen Afterward when you paste the screen via the Clipboard the dummy screen in the destination project will be automatically replaced by the proper screen Special feature with tags Perform the steps listed below so that tags with a PLC connection can be inserted completely in the destination project when copying from one project to another e Assign a self explanatory symbolic name for the PLC in the source project and do not use the system default setting for example PLC_1 e Copy the PLC object to the destination project first so that it is present in both projects with identical parameters The copy the tags belonging to this PLC Special feature of recipes With Windows based systems you can also copy recipes via the Clipboard You will find more information about this at Compatibility of recipes ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 28 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects What is not copied These objects are not copied e Objects that are unknown in the destination project such as functions or command but
188. e pasted a message view to it If you want other objects to follow you must insert a new page When you exit the report editor the report is saved as REPORT_1 You can change this setting by choosing Tools gt Default Settings or assign a name each time with a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters To output the report three times a day to a printer configure a scheduler for each time you want to have the report printed for example at 6 a m 2 p m and 10 p m Configure the Print_Report function for each scheduler and enter the name of the report as a parameter As a result every eight hours the operating unit will automatically send the printer a report with the contents you have selected ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 Messages To display process and operating states or to acquire and log process data on the operating unit that you obtain on the process from the PLC configure messages Messages are normally initiated by the PLC and can be displayed on the operating unit 5 9 1 Displaying operating and process states Displaying operating and process states in messages Configure messages to display process and operating states or to acquire and log process data on the operating unit that you obtain on the process from the PLC Messages are initiated by the operating unit or PLC and can be displaye
189. e the order of the functions by using the Up and Down buttons The list of functions is processed from the top down Note On account of the differing runtimes of the functions the start of the next function in the list is not linked to the completion of the function preceding it in the list Thus it can happen that several functions are being executed concurrently and the result of a previous function is not yet available ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 163 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 10 4 User defined functions Special tasks If you want to execute an action or calculation for which there is no predefined function in ProTool you can use VisualBasic Script to define your own functions and then integrate them and use them just like ProTool functions You will find additional information on VisualBasic Script in Creating VBScripts Function blocks You can also use scripts to create readily reusable function blocks that you can call several times in your project without having to reconfigure all the functions each time ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 164 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 10 5 Special features with conversion functions Conversion possibilities In Windows systems you have two alternatives for converting values between the PLC and
190. ear in each configured screen provided the settings are not subsequently overwritten by an individual screen In that case the changes apply only to that particular screen Local assignment 5 28 Locally assigned function keys trigger different actions on the operating unit depending on the screen A function key whose assignment may vary from screen to screen is referred to as a soft key Assign soft keys locally in the screen editor Click the function key you require for this on the screen With most SIMATIC operating units you can assign to any soft key an icon that illustrates the soft key function by means of text or a graphic Icons can of course only be assigned to soft keys positioned directly on the screen of the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques You can also assign soft keys globally A global assignment is active on all screens to which you do not assign a screen specific function Use globally assigned soft keys for example to change from any screen to the same system screen Note Do not assign functions that have to be permanently available on the operating unit to soft keys Displaying assignments You can see in the Screen Keys dialog box and in the screen editor how your configured soft keys are assigned Yj Inhibited g Assigned locally Assigned globally A Assigned l
191. eceenseceeeeseedeereneeeneees 5 1 5 1 Create SCre ns acia EAE E 9 2 5 1 1 Screen objects in Pr ToO eencuaccuansrenninncnanannna 5 1 2 Libraries 1M PrOVOOl enasna naa 5 1 3 SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeetneeeereea 5 1 4 Colors Of screen Objects iriiria ainaani kaiii aii vance 5 1 5 OMS aces satccivsseccaarvuencadivetccccnsphachasvesccaapeabacdgansbacedaasphecees sanccevvunecuceesbades 5 15 5 1 6 Custom configuration user interface in ProTool seeen 5 16 5 1 7 Dae TIME serenos aai T A 5 1 8 Examples of how to create SCreens cceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeteesnaeeneees 5 1 8 1 How to paste a coolant pump in a screen cceceeceeeeeeeeeenteeeeeees 5 19 5 2 Configuring display elements and Controls ecceceeeeeteeeeetteeeeenees 5 2 1 Output fields text graphic liSt 0 00 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 5 2 2 Input fields selection field 0 0 ccccceeeeeceeecseeteeeeeetseeeeeeseeeneeeteeeeeees 5 2 3 Input fields for date and time 0 ecccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeteees 5 2 4 Input fields for concealed password entry ccccceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeees 5 2 5 Function KOYS oo ee ee eeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeseeieeeseeneeeeeeaaes 5 2 6 Trend VIEW ese oe aces veavincie de net ng vestschivea aan cyevidets seavathageesdiagavadieadesstensedean 5 2 7 Bit trigger FUNCTIONS 0000 cece ee eeenee ee eeeeeeeeeeeaaeeee
192. ecord Create Definition Export Import Transfer Data records Data types STRING Database Importing message text Date 5 46 5 47 Display 5 22 Enter overview Date display Date Time Debugging scripts in ProTool Decimal places with tags Define colors Defining functions Device overview for ProTool Device type Digital clock Direct keys Direct transfer Data records Discard Display Actual values Display actual values Display classes Display classes for ALARM_S messages Display elements Display message class Display messages on the operating unit 5 121 Displaying and setting date time 3 17 Displaying archive data in a specified time window 5 178 Displaying archive data with a time window example Displaying date and time on the TP 170A example 5 49 Displaying date and time on the TP 170A example Displaying messages Displaying messages on the operating unit 5 121 Displaying operating and process states Displaying process states Downloading Downloading executable project files Downloading the executable project file to operating unit Driving LEDs Driving light emitting diodes Dynamic attributes Dynamic graphics Dynamic positioning of screen objects ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Index E Editing data records Editing language Editing projects Enter setpoints Entering Passw
193. ed mode If you configure with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 you can simulate a PLC connection with PLCSIM For more precise details please consult your SIMATIC STEP 7 documentation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Testing projects 6 4 Simulation of the project with the simulator Purpose Using the simulation program you can simulate your project on the configuration computer without a PLC and without an operating unit The simulation program is a stand alone program that is installed together with the runtime software If you have not installed the Runtime software you must install the simulation program separately from the ProTool installation CD ROM You can simulate the following parts of the project with the simulator e Tags e Area pointers which are organized bit by bit event messages and alarm messages Basic procedure The simulation program parameterizes the tags and or area pointers that have to be simulated and activates them Procedure 1 Create a project first in the way you want it to run later with a connected PLC Save and compile your project 3 l Start the simulator directly from the running configuration software by clicking the illustrated symbol or by choosing File gt Test gt Start Simulator from the menu If you start the simulator without compiling the project beforehand compilation is i
194. eeaaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 2 8 Bar graph cessera ceai ieia aiaia eaaa RAEE eA 5 2 9 State ALCAS eee eects erent nenika ee ee CNAE EENAA NAANA AANEEN ENAERE 5 2 10 BUUOMS aoso iee eaa AEEA EAEE E TAE EAT RAEE iA 5 2 11 State buttons aseeessseeesrneseennesesnnndtnnnaaninnndtannadtinnnatannaantnanatannaanannaaaa 5 2 12 Using buttons as direct KOYS eee ceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 5 2 13 Special features with direct keys eeceeceseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 2 14 SWILCNES o eee eect ee erent ee ee tne ee ee disnar ee NANNE eet aeee ee eaaeeeee teases tnaeeeeree 5 2 15 Slider controls 0 00 eec cee eeeeee ee eeee eter eene ee ee eneee ee eeee ee eaeeeeeeneeeeeeieeeereea 5 2 16 Analog dis plays e eeticaodessiden tectaaseeeehe agecevenecnees th aeeetsdaeieereagelie 5 2 17 Date time display eose aE EESE EAEE EANAN 5 2 18 Digital analog ClOCK jet iceacisaectiipietie sk acumen A 5 2 19 Configuring the date and time for Panels 0 ceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeaes 5 48 5 2 19 1 How to display the date and time on the TP 170A nescence 5 49 5 2 19 2 How to set the date and time on the TP 170A 5 2 19 3 How to synchronize the date and time with the PLC 5 2 19 4 How to configure the date and time for XP170B ieee 5 3 Using TAGS asnon a E Oa 5 3 1 Properes Of tags coensosserioe in neers i aide ieee tian 5 3 2 ANIV OJS oaoa gaccuisd ace cfedidadeuetiadecestsbadacheei E 5 3 3 Ee e E E E A A 5 3 4 Up
195. eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeecnecaeeeeeeeseneenaees Examples of creating VBScripts cccceceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeseestcaeeeeees Example of a subroutine ccccececeeeeeseececeeeeeeeceeeaeceeeeeeeseestaeeeeees Example Of a FUNGON nierica coeanncsaveatens aaa fd Configuring in foreign languages eect eteeeeeeteteeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeees System requirements for foreign langUagGeS ecceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeee Languages in ProTOol ccccccccceeesscceeeescceeeseeceeeeeeeeceeenseceeeenseeeeneeeees System message lANQUAGES ceeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeteee ee teteeeeeteaeeeeetneeeeee Language dependent keyboard assignment eeeeeeeeeesteeeetees Referente text siccccccciannceaicieeisineneisicientessneteeeeaeceeseseianenannntaend Steps to creating a multilingual Project cece eeteeeeeenteeeeeee Exchanging text with translators 0 ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenas Requirements for configuring in Asian languages eeeeeeees Constraints on projects in Asian languages ccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeees ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1ABO Release 12 02 Contents 6 Testing projects eee 6 1 6 1 The Windows CE Control Panel esseeeeseesesseerreseerrssrerrsserrrssrerrsseeens 6 2 6 2 Downloading the executable project file 0 22 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeee 6 3 Simulation OptonS esnia ceancetassca
196. eeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeseesaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 5 5 1 Making optimum use Of graphics 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 5 5 2 SAU TOKE cara rn cvs ili de etnnueevevlicersd nia tevel dtl devastated 5 5 3 Vector graphic elemens secerni 5 6 Creating tend asnon iri E lai 5 7 Configuring schedulers 0 00 eeeceeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeetaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 5 8 Creating repons oeno a ad 5 8 1 Printing messages in a report sessssessseserrssssrnesssnnasennnaasinnastenneenanna 5 8 2 Printing recipes in a rePOrt 2 ce eeceeeeeeecececeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeseteenneeeeeeeess 5 8 3 Page numbers in rePOrts ceeeccceceecceceeeeeceeeteeeceeeeeeeceenenseneeeetneetes 5 8 4 Example of creating reports ceceesecceceeeeeeeneceeceeeeeseeeenueeeeeeeeeeees 5 8 4 1 How to create a report cc ccccceccceeeceecncceceeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeseseeenenaeeeeeeess 5 9 Messages oeni readers ante a a heed niet reteceene atleast 5 9 1 Displaying operating and process states eeeeeeeeseeeeeenteeeeeenes 5 9 2 The components Of a MESSAGE eeeeececeteeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeteeeeeetnaeeeeee 5 9 3 Message properties c cccccececeeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeseeecnneeeeeeetees 5 9 4 Acknowledging MESSAGES eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeenaeees 5 9 5 Settings for message CIASSES 2 0 0 eee eeeeeeceeeteeeeeeteeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeenas 5 9 6 System MESSAGES 00 0 ee eeeeee scene eeeeeeneeecee
197. eeeeeenteeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeaaes 5 9 14 Examples of configuring MESSAGES ceeeeeeeeeeneeeceenteeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 9 14 1 How to configure alarm messages ccceeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenas 5 9 14 2 Message areas for SIMATIC S500 ee ecceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 9 14 3 Message areas for SIMATIC S70 eeeeecceeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 9 14 4 Examples of system messages ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 5 9 14 5 Event messages export file ee ceeccecceececeeseeeceeneeeeceeneneeeeeneneeeestenes 5 10 USING TUNGO S cuanensis iinet 5 10 1 Events for triggering functions ssseeeeeeeeeeseerreeerrsrerrrssrerrssrernsseeens 5 10 2 Function parameters smacis iii iiaiai uaaa 5 10 3 Combining multiple functions 0 eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeas 5 10 4 User defined functions 00 0 eee eenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 10 5 Special features with conversion functions ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 6 Example of configuring a function ooo ee eeeeeeeenteeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeenaes 5 10 6 1 How to change the operating mode with a current display 5 11 Create archives eeicccecevisteecndieeerertinaceersiaeeviiice tina nace 5 11 1 Archiving process data ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseeaeereeeaees ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 vii C
198. eeeteeaas Scenario 1 How to enter data records ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeees Scenario 2 Manual production process c c esceceeeeeeeeeeseeeees Scenario 3 Automated production process job list Prompting the Operator ccccceceeeeeeeeececeeeeeseeeeeaeceeeeeeeseestcaeeeeess Help information on the operating UNnit ccceceeceeeeeeeteesecteeeeees On Screen keyboard 000 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee eect eeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeetieeeeeenaeeeere Icons for local function KCYS eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas Showing and hiding Objects 2 2 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeetnaeeeeetneeeees Dynamic attributes oo eect eee eeee cere eee eeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeseeaeeeeetaeeeeeenas Light emitting diodes on the operating Unit 0 cc eeeeeeeeeeeenees TAD OND ainn EEEE EEEE EEEE Width and order of columns screen objects Dynamic Screen Objects cccccesccccecssececeeesececetsececeesnseceeeeseeeeenensees Assigning operator permiSSiOns cccccceeeseeeeeeneeeeeeenueeeeeenaeeeeeeaas Password administration cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeneae Creating VE SENDIS eosin tees E Using Pro Tool objects in SCripts ce eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteteeeeetteeeerene Internal script tags and ProTool tags ceeeeeeeeseeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeaes Debugging scripts in Pro ToOl sissisodan sinnani Constraints with VBScript ccccceceee
199. egrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Release 12 02 3 6 Connecting to STEP 7 Lite General ProTool will automatically detect a STEP 7 Lite installation on your configuration computer If you create a new project and use the SIMATIC S7 300 400 driver a selection is added to the Parameters dialog box area A SIMATIC S7 3007400 rook x OP Parameters Address fi Cancel Interface DP MPI Only Master on the Bus v m Network Parameters _ r Communication Peer Address Profile MPI Expansion Slot Baud Rate 187 5 2d Rack Cyclic Operation More A u EE Path for Step Lite project E Siemens Step7Lite SysT est_PTPv6 k p a Here you can select a STEP 7 Lite project The symbol information is stored in the project for example If the CPU was configured in STEP 7 Lite its address has already been saved in the project Constraints The following constraints apply to STEP 7 Lite e STEP 7 Lite supports only one CPU e When you work with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 STEP 7 Lite is not supported For further information please consult your STEP 7 Lite documentation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 3 10 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 3 7 How to restore the symbolic tag connections Background Procedure The connection between a S7 CPU and a ProTool P
200. erating mode status has not been changed The operating status of the PLC specified is changed by the function PLC Connect Isolate The operating mode is now offline The operating status of the PLC specified is changed by the function PLC Connect Isolate The operating mode is now online Evaluate the additional system message related to this message which is also issued Check the configuration the ODBC Open Database Connectivity and the specified drive Delete the existing tables manually in advance Stop the runtime delete the archive and restart the runtime again Or Configure a button in the runtime which contains the same actions as the function trigger and press it Check the connection to the PLCs Check whether the address area for the area pointer Coordination in the PLC is available ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 110005 An attempt was made to use the function Switch the complete system PLC Connect Isolate to switch the to operating mode online and specified PLC to operating mode online execute the function again although the entire system is in operating mode Offline This switch over is not permissible The PLC remains in operating mode offline 110006 The Colorado system has been Check the user versions extended by the addition of the User Either the wrong
201. erminated in the subscript specified script In this case it is advisable to check any Check tags whether the previous system messages too types used are permissible Check Functions whether the number and types of parameter are correct 20012 Inconsistent configuration data is Compile the configuration present Therefore the script could not again be created 20013 VBScript dll is not correctly installed Re install ProTool Pro RT Therefore no scripts can be executed 20014 A value is returned by the script function Select the specified script in which is not written in any configured the configuration return tag Check whether the script name has been assigned a value 20015 Too many scripts have been triggered in Check where the scripts are quick succession being triggered from If more than 20 scripts are queued to be Extend the times e g the processed any subsequent scripts are polling time of the tags which rejected trigger the scripts In this case the script indicated in the message is not executed 30010 The tag could not accept the function Check the tag type of the result e g in the case of exceeding the function parameter value range ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages A function could not be executed Check the parameter value because the function was assigned an and tag type of
202. ers Applies to ProTool Pro CS version 5 2 or higher plus Service Pack 3 User Manual ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Preface Release 12 02 Release 12 01 Valid for ProTool CS 6 0 or higher Release 12 02 Valid for ProTool CS 6 0 Service Pack 2 or higher Trademarks The following names are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG e SIMATIC e SIMATIC HMI e SIMATIC Multi Panel e SIMATIC Multifunctional Platform e SIMATIC Panel PC e HMI ProAgent e ProTool e ProTool Lite e ProTool Pro The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner ii User Manual ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1ABO Release 12 02 Preface Customer and Technical Support Available round the clock worldwide Do x aS Johnson City gt 2 Singapore Worldwide Nuremberg Technical Support FreeContact Local time Mon Fri 8 00 to 17 00 Telephone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 E Mail techsupport ad siemens de GMT 1 00 Worldwide Nuremberg Technical Support fee based only with SIMATIC Card Local time Mon Fri 0 00 to 24 00 Telephone 49 911 895 7777 Fax 49 911 895 7001 GMT 01 00 Europa
203. es or Message events from the message buffer or message archive To display the message archive you must have configured a message view All the features offered for message display by default only access the volatile message buffer ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 7 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Screen Description object Single message view The single message view features a subgroup of the functions of the message view You can use it to implement for example a message line in a screen Status Force Using the Status Force Tag screen object can read and write directly to individual address areas on the connected SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7 Password list In ProTool you can protect entry operations by means of passwords Passwords have to be assigned for permission levels 0 no password to 9 administrator The password list is required to enter the passwords for the different permission levels on the operating unit J Recipe view With recipe view the operator can display and edit data records on the operating unit o Digital analog clock With digital analog clock you can either display the system time on the operating unit as a clock with hands or digitally l Slider controls Using the slider the operator can enter and read off numerical values When entering values the operator slides the slider for example with the
204. essage editor With the check box selected every message is logged on every change of state active cleared and acknowledged By choosing System gt Messages gt Settings from the menu you can select the corresponding check box to activate message logging for the project Report You also have the option of collectively reading out the messages from the message buffer or a message archive at certain times by configuring a scheduler or linked to certain events such as key operation To do this you configure a report and include the Message Printout object in the report ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 120 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 8 Displaying messages on the operating unit Types of message view You can view messages in global message windows on the operating unit and configure a message view in a screen for example Message indicator Set display of the message indicator on the operating unit by choosing System gt Screen Keys from the menu The message indicator indicates that alarm messages are waiting or have to be acknowledged The message indicator can be used with touch devices As soon as an alarm message is waiting an alarm message window and the message indicator are displayed The message indicator may assume two states e Flashing as soon as at least one unacknowledged alarm message is queued e Sta
205. et automatically in the order in which the screen objects were created In ProTool you can also configure the tab order yourself This can be useful if you want to enable the operator to switch to a certain screen object quickly or if a particular sequence is dictated by the screen purpose itself To do this go to the ProTool screen editor and switch to a different editing mode by choosing Edit gt Tab Order from the menu In this mode you can edit only the tab order of screen objects not the screen objects themselves a JJ 000 00 Q 000 00 H 000 00 000 00 b fJ 000 00 f 000 00 fJ 000 00 f 000 00 c ff 000 00 i oo0 00 FR poo0 00 FRo00 00 Caculation Rk 00000 FZ o0000 F 00000 M00000 4 lt 000 00 lt 000 00 lt 000 00 lt 000 00 4 Screen in Tab Order mode ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 219 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 In Tab Order mode a number is displayed upper left of each operated screen object this is the tab order number Using the mouse you can then freely edit the assignment of these numbers You can also exclude screen objects from the Tab order With the Tab order number you can now set which field will be active after a change of screens which might be triggered by Select Screen Permanent or Select Screen Variable Press ESC or use the menu to exit Tab Order mode Tab order of imported screens Sc
206. ew recipe screens Configure one or more screens if you want to be able to create save and transfer data records on the operating unit For this depending on the case use either the recipe view or map your system to recipe screens with input output fields Recipe view The recipe view enables you to handle recipes and data records quickly and straightforwardly with minimal configuration Typically you will use it to edit data records of smaller recipes in tabular form Recipe screens You can use recipe screens to customize the user interface for editing data records and simulate the visual appearance of your system by using graphics and individual masks for entering the data records Recipe screens are particularly recommended for data records with a relatively high number of entries You decide whether to use recipe view or recipe screen editing options in Recipe Properties by setting the Synchronize tags option on the Options tab Synchronize tags The data of a data record which has been read is written to the tags or read from the tags you configured for the recipe If you want to be able to enter and change data records via a recipe screen position the tags defined in the recipe in screens by using input fields for example Do not synchronize tags The data of a data record which has been read are only displayed in the recipe view table and can only be edited in the recipe view If you use the same tags in screens as
207. example change modes In most cases you can configure the behavior of the functions precisely by means of parameters If you wish to initiate several actions you can also combine different functions ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 157 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Configuration 5 158 You configure functions on the Functions tab in the Properties dialog box of the object in question In addition you can define global entry points for example for change of screens buffer overflow and change of password for many operating units by choosing System gt Functions from the menu ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 10 1 Events for triggering functions Necessity The execution of a function is always linked to a specific event The function is only triggered when this event occurs The events that can be linked to a function depend on the type of the function Many functions are only effective with certain specific events Examples of events Examples of events that can trigger functions are the events press key and release key In the case of the former the function is executed the moment a particular function key is pressed in the latter case it is executed the moment the function key is released again Object linked f
208. ey are adapted automatically so that the object remains visible on the screen ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 13 10 Assigning operator permissions Purpose ProTool allows you to use a password to prevent controls such as input fields and function keys from being used by those unauthorized to do so This means that when you are creating your project you can restrict the use of functions that relate to security to specific people or groups of operators Important parameters and settings can thus only be changed by authorized personnel The access protection that you configure allows you to guard against incorrect usage and increase the security of the system or machine Password hierarchy During the configuration phase you can assign operator authorization to specific groups At run time individuals can be allocated to one of these groups as appropriate and they thus automatically receive the access rights of that group ProTool provides hierarchically organized password levels from level 0 to 9 Ifa user is assigned password level 4 for example this user is authorized to execute the functions of password levels 0 to 4 e Password level 0 Password level 0 is the default in ProTool Use this lowest level in the hierarchy for functions that have little or no effect on the operational sequence These are generally functions
209. f data records has been completed successfully 290052 Acknowledgement that the exportation of Ensure that the structure of medium and the current recipe structure on the operating unit are identical 290053 Acknowledgement that the importation of data records has been started 290054 Acknowledgement that the importation of data records has been completed successfully 290055 Acknowledgement that the importation of Ensure that the structure of data records has been terminated due to the data records on the data medium and the current recipe structure on the operating unit are identical 290056 The value in the specified line column Check the specified could not be read written without errors line column The action was canceled ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 25 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 90057 The tags of the recipe specified have been switched from operating mode offline to online Each modification of a tag in this recipe is now immediately transferred to the PLC data record if necessary 90059 Acknowledgement that the specified data record has been stored successfully 2 290058 The tags of the recipe specified were switched from operating mode online to offline Modifications to tags in this recipe are no longer immediately transferred to the PLC but must be transferred there e
210. file internal flash memory or PC card refer to equipment manual e The project file must be downloaded with the source file ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Testing projects What happens during download and upload operations Upload When the source file is transferred during a Download operation the project is compressed from the source format pdb and transferred as a paz file to the external storage medium of the operating unit or directly to the PC Following uploading the file is decompressed in ProTool You have to give the new project a name on the configuration device Note The uploaded and decompressed project file pdb can only be opened ina version ProTool whose version number is higher than or equal to the version number of the program with which the project was created Caution ProTool has no way of checking whether the source file on the operating unit really does belong to the project operated on it If you have performed a download without simultaneously downloading the source file at some time or other old project data may still be on the operating unit It is possible that the data no longer belong to the current project If you wish to download your configuration with the Enable upload option the configuration computer also transfers the compressed source file pdz to the external memory card
211. fixed window as the border and title bar are missing from the window If the Full Screen setting is deselected the project runs in a Windows type window with border and title bar The operator can vary the size of the window he can minimize or maximize the window put the window in the task bar or close it and thus exit ProTool Pro RT If you select this check box the on screen keyboard will be displayed automatically at run time when you select an input field This is practical with non touch devices and mouse operated devices If you select this check box the operator is shown tooltips at run time for the input fields you configured such as limit values If you select this check box the cursor control acts in the same way as in ProTool 5 10 Of course depending on the project requirements you can combine settings for run time This allows you for example to ensure that a system is only available in a specific ProTool project ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 8 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 6 PLC drivers PLC drivers available for Windows based systems Select the PLC driver with the project assistant in the Select PLC dialog box You can also define or later edit the parameters there if you select PLC Properties in the project window Note You will find information about the various PLC drivers at Star
212. g to access the scaled value in the PLC Functions With the following functions you can perform linear scaling for the value of a tag and store it in a second tag or forward it to the PLC Tag dialog box Scale tab For a tag with the PLC connection Variable_1 linear scaling is automatic before it is transferred to the PLC A corresponding reverse transformation is performed on values from the PLC before the value in Variable_1 is changed on the operating unit le Linearly 1 Variable_ 1 without a PLC connection undergoes le Linearly 2 linear scaling to Variable_2 You will find an example of using the Scaling tab in the topic called Automatically converting entered values for the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 84 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 12 Examples of configuring tags Using examples we will show you here how you configure a multiplex tag and how a tag archive is structured 5 3 12 1 How to configure a multiplex tag address multiplexing Procedure To multiplex an address create the following tag for example C Procedure Select Insert gt Object to configure a new tag for any object In the Tag dialog box enter Variable_1 as the name of the new tag On the Address tab select INT at Type and enter the address as 3 DB 50 DBB 0 Click this button to open the Address Multiplexing
213. g by double clicking Multiplex tag in the project window All configured multiplex tags are displayed in the project window ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 79 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 3 7 Archiving tags Principle Windows based systems offer you the opportunity to archive process data in other words store them permanently and analyze them You set the trigger condition and the range of values for archiving a tag in the Tag dialog box on the Archive tab You will find more information at Archiving process data and in the example called Establishing an archive for tags ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 80 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 8 Functions to change tags Converting tags linearly In the Tag dialog box on the Scaling tab you can configure the value of a tag to be converted linearly between the PLC and the operating unit The tag values are converted in accordance with the following equation y a x b The scaling is applied logically between the PLC value and the tag in other words the scaled value is already contained in the tag If you do not configure scaling the tag value on the PLC corresponds to the tag value displayed on the operating unit Functions to change tags Here you are given an overview of the various functio
214. ges of STEP 7 integration With integrated configuration you access the database that you created when you configured the PLC in SIMATIC STEP 7 You then have the following advantages e You can use SIMATIC Manager as a central point for creating editing and managing ProTool projects e The communication parameters of the PLC are created as default values when you create your ProTool project and reset when SIMATIC STEP 7 is changed SIMATIC S7 3007400 Ed gt DP Parameters Soy Define the parameters yourself MPIC Address 9 pal PROFIBUS 1 Interface IF1 B hd m Network Parameters Profile DP Baud 1500 v Choose a communication peer symbol list More Define the parameters yourself Not networked Peer Parameters PROFIBUS 1 PA Ob CP 443 5 DP Master CPU 215 2 DP Expansion CPU413 2 DP Rack CPU 413 2 DP 1 ET 2008 16D ET 200M IM153 ET 200M IM153 1151 4 Example of the Driver Parameters dialog box with STEP 7 integration network parameters and parameters of the peer are set as default values ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 3 1 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Release 12 02 e When configuring tags and area pointers you can directly access the STEP 7 symbols in ProTool Simply select the STEP 7 icon in the ProTool tag dialog box to which you
215. glish modify the time output simultaneously to the 24 hour format since the standard width of the time field in the message view is geared to the 24 hour format ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 125 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 10 Configuring message processing Usage You can configure messages to give the operator the opportunity to process the active message To do this configure a suitable function for the edit message message event for example Select Screen Permanent When the message has arrived the operator can then press the Process button perform the necessary steps on the screen he has opened and exit the screen Note The screen in which the message arrived is not automatically redisplayed to the operator After changing screens with the Process button he can only operate the current screen Note that a message which you get rid off by clicking is acknowledged automatically Steps to take to configure message processing 5 126 To make it possible to edit messages take the following steps 1 Open the screen in question In the Message View dialog box on the Display tab configure the Process button by selecting the Button for processing check box 2 Open Alarm messages for example in the project window Highlight the message in question and in the Attributes dialog box click the Functi
216. guration too ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 23 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 2 Input fields selection field Purpose Input fields List boxes 5 24 In input fields the operator enters values on the operating unit that are transferred to the PLC The values can be optionally numerical alphanumeric or symbolic If you define limit values for the input field tag operator inputs on the operating unit that are outside the specified range of values are rejected In input fields for numerical and alphanumeric values you enter the value one character at a time on the operating unit A numerical value for example is the number 80 as the setpoint for a temperature An example of an alphanumeric value is the text string Valve_12 Input fields for numeric and alphanumeric values are created on the open screen on the Screen Objects toolbar by choosing the illustrated button or at Insert gt Input Field You can configure among other things the following displays for input for use with special tasks e Password The string you enter is displayed in the input field with placeholders e Date and time The values you enter for the date and time are formatted depending on the language In list boxes you do not enter the value one character at a time but select this value on the operating unit from a list On the list you assign the va
217. guring recipes Basic procedure 5 194 The basic steps to configuring a recipe are listed below 1 Define the recipe structure Assign tags to the structure of the recipe Assign technological entry names to these tags Define a name for the recipe You will use this name to select the recipe in your project and on the operating unit Set recipe tag properties In the recipe properties you can control the recipe tag properties on the Options tab With the Synchronize tags option selected you specify that the data of a data record which has been read from the PLC or data medium has been written to the tags or has been read from the tags you configured for the recipe This establishes a connection between the tags configured in the recipe and the tags in the screens When a data record is loaded the values are written to the tags you are using on the screens If the Tags offline option is also set values you enter are only saved in the tags but not downloaded to the PLC If this option is not set the values you enter are transferred directly to the PLC 2 Set data record storage to the operating unit You can configure the storage path for the data records Check the set storage location if you copy recipes between configurations with different destination devices Note In the Recipe dialog box at Properties gt Archive avoid specifying a path name that refers to a floppy disk drive since the system is blocked d
218. h as Data record deleted or Disk full A system message consists of a message number and message text The message text may contain internal system tags that provide further details on the cause of an error message Note The operator will find a numerical list of HMI system messages their causes and remedial action in an appendix to the equipment manuals and the Communication Manual for Windows Based Systems Displaying system messages on the operating unit System messages have to be transferred by the system to the operating unit Choose System gt Messages gt System Messages from the menu to set which e SIMATIC OP HMI system messages from SIMATIC operating units cannot be deselected e SIMATIC S7 minimal S7 PLC system messages in abbreviated form The message numbers of the S7 system messages with time stamp are read out The operator can refer to the cause of the error in his S7 manual by referring to the number e SIMATIC S7 default S7 PLC system messages in long form In addition to the minimal display the message text of the S7 system message is output e SIMOTION Messages from SIMOTION PLCs These messages are displayed in a message view for diagnostics events that is not in a message window You determine which system messages you want to have output to the message window and how long they will be displayed on the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure
219. he operating unit to make operation easier Note To many flashing and transparent objects can have a negative impact on the screen change frequency and updates ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 21 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 1 Purpose Output fields text graphic list Output fields display current values from the PLC on the operating unit The values may be output optionally in numerical alphanumeric or symbolic form Numerical and alphanumeric output Output fields for numerical or alphanumeric values show the value as a number or as text A numerical value for example is the number 80 as the actual value of a temperature An example of an alphanumeric value is the text string Valve_12 E You configure output fields for numeric and alphanumeric values on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by choosing the button shown Symbolic output Output fields for symbolic values do not display the true value but optionally a text string or a graphic from a text or graphic list For example you can store the two states of a valve in a text list or in a graphic list When the valve is open the output field then points for example to the text string OPEN or to a corresponding graphic By using output fields for symbolic values you eliminate misinterpretations on the part of the operator to a large extent since a symbolic val
220. he recipe editor Properties button Transfer tab Note Communication with the PLC is described in the Communication for Windows based Systems manuals in the section called Data mailbox for synchronized transfer ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 6 Editing data records Creating data records The following options are open to you for creating data records e Data records are created by operator input on the operating unit e You use the functions Export_Data_Records and Import_Data_Records Procedure for external creation 1 Create a data record with a symbolic name 2 Configure the function Export _Data_Records in order to export data records on the operating unit to the storage medium as CSV files In this way you can easily edit data records using external tool such as a spreadsheet program or text editor Information such as recipe name recipe number data record name and data record number is stored in the first two lines That is followed by the values for the data record this then provides a pattern for the structure 3 You then reimport the data records on the operating unit with the Import _Data_Records function Detailed instructions on how to create data records and transfer them to the PLC are given in the manual Recipes for Windows Based Systems Note Only use Western Europea
221. hich the Runtime software is installed you can address it in ProTool Runtime as a PLC In addition you can communicate over a network with SIMATIC PLCs outside the PC station Profibus ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 3 3 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Release 12 02 PrceiesOOCOCSCSOSSCSCSC CS C Y Start SIMATIC Manager Select a STEP 7 project or create a new STEP 7 project 3 Choose the Paste gt Station gt SIMATIC PC Station option from the menu and enter a name for the SIMATIC PC station Note Also take note of the online Help in STEP 7 and the documentation on the SIMATIC NET CD ROM More information is available in the ProTool Information System at Technical data and system limits Select the Open Object from the shortcut menu of the SIMATIC PC station right click HW Config is started and the PC station is opened in it Select the Paste gt Hardware Components option from the menu The Hardware Catalog dialog box appears Select SIMATIC PC Station gt HMI and drag the entry SIMATIC ProTool Pro RT to a spare slot in the PC dialog box Do not use slot 2 since it is reserved for Soft CPUs WinAC 7 Close the HW Config application Start ProTool by double clicking the ProTool project Then select the operating unit for the project K SIMATIC Manager a c SIEMENS Step S projia
222. hniques 5 1 4 Colors of screen objects Color attribute Colors You can assign one or more colors to each screen object created in ProTool Depending on the screen object you can configure different colors for the following color attributes for example e Background e Foreground e Exceeding the limit values You can allocate a color to each color attribute Several colors are available to you for this assignment e Default colors 16 default colors are permanently defined and cannot be changed e Project colors You can select any 8 project colors you like from a range of colors These colors are globally available throughout the project To define project colors to your range of colors choose Tools gt Colors from the menu or double click in the Colors toolbar on one of the project color fields in Colors e Different colors For each color attribute you can also select a specific color from a range of colors This color applies to the current color attribute only It is not globally available in the entire project and cannot be selected on the Colors toolbar To assign a specific color click the Different Color button on the Color tab Colors toolbar The Colors toolbar is available to you in the screen editor for rapid selection of colors It contains the following elements 0800080 L O Pi Eu 1 selected foreground color 2 selected background color 3 16 invariable standard colors
223. hniques 5 15 3 System message languages System messages You cannot edit system messages in ProTool They have been stored for every operating unit for a number of languages already If you are configuring a language for which no system messages are available all the system messages will appear in English Languages System messages for your operating unit are available in the following languages e Chinese PRC e Chinese Taiwan e Danish e German e English e Finnish e Flemish e French e Greek e Italian e Korean e Norwegian e Polish e Portuguese e Russian e Swedish e Spanish e Czech e Turkish e Hungarian e Japanese ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 243 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 15 4 Language dependent keyboard assignment Language dependence The characters on a PC keyboard are language dependent For example no German or French special characters are available on an English keyboard Further the letters are arranged somewhat differently As soon as you change the editing language when you are configuring ProTool modifies the assignment of your keyboard to the layout of the foreign language concerned On screen keyboard 5 244 In order to facilitate the assignment of the characters printed on your keyboard and those actually entered ProTool displays a language dependent on screen keyboard You can see
224. hown in brackets after each object for example PIC_5 deleted ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 33 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 General Information 4 34 The commands Undo and Redo only work with actions taken since the last time the project was saved If for example you move a screen object and then save your project you cannot later cancel this action These are some of the rules that apply to Undo Redo e Settings in dialog boxes properties of a field can only be canceled in their entirety It is not possible to open the dialog box and discard individual entries e With multilevel dialog boxes only changes to the primary object are recorded Modifications to underlying objects or creations or deletions cannot be reversed Example project window Edit Tag gt Edit Limit Value Tag You can only undo changes to the tag here e Undo Redo is special to ProTool With a project integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 the Undo buffer cannot be accessed by a higher level SIMATIC Step 7 Undo Manager ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 11 7 Undoing the last action Possible procedures To cancel your last action in ProTool choose one of the three following options e Choose Edit gt Undo from the menu The last act
225. ic graphics are static display elements that are not connected to the PLC They cannot be modified at run time on the operating unit Use static graphics for example for displaying your system or as explanatory symbols for dynamic display elements and controls e Dynamic graphics Dynamic graphics are display elements that are connected to the PLC The position of the graphic on the operating unit can change at run time Use dynamic graphics to display the fill level of a tank for example Creating graphics ProTool features an option of embedding external graphic editors via the OLE interface In this way you can create graphics with your usual applications without having to become familiar with a new graphics program Once created a graphic is embedded in ProTool either as a bitmap or as a vector graphic depending on the graphics program you are using You configure a static graphic on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the button shown is You configure a dynamic graphic on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the button shown Note To make a graphic operable configure an invisible button which you can place over the graphic ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 93 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Possible graphics programs You can use the following program versions to create vector or pixe
226. icity of functions offered by ProTool for printing out documenting and managing and archiving your project data 7 1 Printing project data Print function ProTool provides a comprehensive printout function that can be accessed by choosing File gt Print from the menu It provides detailed lists for documenting all project relevant data such as screens messages tags symbol tables etc arveMlaam Screen amber 5 By k Dpowr BO NGHAOWAtms a bat HiH HiHaoN Owams fA Montor Deutaton aam z Tate square rootor Pv Rat ofciage atam Print function in ProTool In this way it provides the facility for documenting your complete project An up to date printout can also be very helpful while you are configuring Note When configuring as an alternative to the printout function there is also the user friendly cross reference function offered by ProTool ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 7 1 Documenting and managing projects Release 12 02 Structuring the printout Reports 7 2 ProTool subdivides printouts into chapters arranged by subject according to object types For example one chapter contains all the definitions on the subject of screens another contains a list of all the tags and yet another a list of all the defined text or graphic lists
227. ime the Find dialog box is displayed initially Here you choose the drives and directories which have to be searched for ProTool files Only those projects that are located within these directories are displayed by Project Manager Find C PROTOOL Find dialog box After you have selected the appropriate directories or when you call Project Manager later again the Project Manager window proper appears ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 7 5 Documenting and managing projects Release 12 02 Display 7 6 Project Manager Bd proLv520 amp pc_tab pdb amp opl7 pdb amp op3 pdb amp pc_neu pdb 52 amp tpl70a pdb f siemens protool 620 f samples Project Manager In the left segment of the Project Manager you will see a hierarchical structure of all the projects located in the directories in which Project Manager searched Here you can select a project in order to open it delete it or back it up In the center segment of the window Project data you will find detailed information on the project highlighted on the list Using the buttons in the area on the right you can extend the list of scanned directories Find button have the directories searched again Update button and have the list sorted by different project data such as project name device type date created etc Sort
228. in ProTool Pro The area pointer is not updated because it is not possible to map the PLC type in the area pointer type Parameter type and no See message 190100 Observe the value range for the tag type Increase the time interval between the multi writing tasks Ensure that the value entered is within the value range of the PLC tags Check the connection to the PLC Check the value range or type of the variable Check the configuration ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 190102 The area pointer is updated following an error status after the cause of the last error state has been eliminated return to normal operation Parameter type and no See message 190100 200000 Coordination is not executed because Change the address or set up the address configured in the PLC does the address in the PLC not exist has not been set up 200001 Coordination is not executed because Change the address or set up the address configured in the PLC the address in the PLC in an cannot be written area which can be written 200002 Coordination is not carried out at the Internal error moment because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format 200003 Coordination can be executed again because the last error status has been eliminated return to normal operation 20000
229. in the I O area of the SIMATIC S7 The bit area is set in SIMATIC STEP 7 The bit is set when the direct key is touched and reset when the key is released or when you quit the screen Requirements e At the time your project is generated ProTool is installed and integrated e The operating unit is connected to a SIMATIC S7 over the PROFIBUS DP during operation e You have defined the bit area for direct keys in SIMATIC STEP 7 you will find configuration tips in the Communication Manual a Sees aaa TP 270 6 32 v SD TP 270 10 40 0 MP 270 TOUCH MP 370 TOUCH 0 0 39 MP 370 15 TOUCH ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 37 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 13 Special features with direct keys Functionality of DP direct keys The functionality of the DP direct keys has been modeled on that of the hard wired hardware keys Particular attention was paid to the fast response time Windows CE based key operated devices With Windows CE based key operated devices you have to bear in mind that key operation is evaluated irrespective of the screen that happens to be shown such as when the screen saver is active For Windows based touch operated devices With touch operated devices you have to remember further that the direct key is triggered only by touch control and not by clicking the mouse Password protection is not supported for butto
230. ing an entry in the date time field the operator can reset the time tag and thus set the scheduler 5 101 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 8 Creating reports Usage On visualization systems reports are used to document process data and executed production cycles A report therefore documents the operations carried out during a working shift With ProTool you can perform the following for example e Configure a report that is output at the end of a shift and in which for example downtimes are documented e Configure a report that can be used in product or quality testing ISO 9000 as documentation Project pe_nc OP x Ia PC pe_ne Name Type Screens E REPORT_1 A4 210 x 297 mm Portrait amp Messages E REPORT_2 44 210 x 297 mm Portrait E Recipes REPORT_3 a Tags Controllers E Scripts H Archives g Text Graphic Lists 2 Graphics Trends ras Scheduler Protocols 297 mm Portrait 3 Object s 1 objects selected Examples of reports in the project window For a report define the contents layout and the event at which you want printing of the report to be triggered You can configure up to 10 different reports Every report can be up to 10 pages long ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 102 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Report contents Set the co
231. ing system meaning that you can export and import text in Cyrillic characters only with a Russian operating system If you do not have a localized operating system you can configure text with non Latin characters in ProTool but you cannot export or import it Non Latin characters are displayed a question marks when text is saved If you import text in a csv file ProTool with non Latin characters in ProTool these characters are imported as question marks Note Remember not to change or add text manually in the time between exporting and importing the text but to have these changes translated in good time Manually changed or added text will be overwritten by the text in the import file on being imported ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 251 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 15 8 Requirements for configuring in Asian languages Asian Windows system 5 252 A requirement for creating a project with Asian blocks of text is an Asian Windows system or Windows 2000 multilingual as the operating system The necessary character sets can only be accessed in these Windows systems Even the compilation must be carried out on an Asian Windows system otherwise the project language will be ignored during compilation Under certain conditions it is possible to download projects in which an Asian project language has been selected on a non Asian Windows system
232. ing to buffer 1 The switch buffer prevents the PLC from overwriting values while the operating unit is reading the trend Buffer 1 Buffer 2 PLC writes Trend buffer is full bit is set in trend transfer area 1 Switch buffer reading and writing trend values simultaneously Display archive data as a trend Data from an archive are displayed as a history trend An application for trends of this kind are for example a turn on operation or a temperature pattern upon heating a furnace ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 100 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 7 Configuring schedulers Purpose A scheduler defines a periodically recurring or unique time at which a particular function is to be executed When a scheduler has run its course the configured function is triggered Typical applications are for example print and archive functions that have to be executed regularly at a particular time slot The following table shows the available scheduler types fatxmintemenals Changing schedulers at run time ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 You can change the scheduler intervals on the operating unit for the following scheduler types at run time e daily e annually e once only For this configure the scheduler to a time tag and the time tag to a date time field By mak
233. ion that can be undone canceled is shown in abbreviated form after the menu command A longer description is given in the status bar Click the Undo button on the toolbar This opens a tooltip which shows you the last action that can be undone canceled You are given the same information in the status bar e Press CTRL and Z simultaneously In contrast to the first two options you are not given any feedback about which action has been canceled If you keep executing the Undo command you can successively cancel all the recorded modifications 4 11 8 Redoing the last action Possible procedures To restore your last canceled action in ProTool choose one of the three following options e Choose the Edit gt Redo command from the menu The last undone action is shown in abbreviated form after the menu option A longer description is given in the status bar a Click the Redo button on the toolbar This opens a tooltip which shows you the last canceled action You are given the same information in the status bar e Press CTRL and Y simultaneously In contrast to the first two options you are not given any feedback about which action has been restored If you keep executing the Redo command you can successively restore all the recorded cancellations ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 35 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 12
234. ipes The manner in and the route used for transferring data records between the different components A B and C will depend on the recipe and the functions used The figure shows the data flow that might occur when recipes are used ext data medium Memory medium Display DBIDEWO 5 DB2DBW0 95 DBSDBWO 3 DB4DEWWO 100 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 187 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 The operating unit A stores recipe data records on a memory medium such as a FLASH memory or hard disk You can then edit a recipe data record in a recipe view or a recipe screen on the operating unit display e You can enter a new data record save it on the memory medium 2 for example and transfer 3 it to the PLC B e You can export the data record to an external data medium C to a PC for example The data record is stored on it independently of the recipe in CSV format You can load this file in MS Excel for example and continue editing it e Similarly you can load an existing data record from the memory medium of the operating unit 2 or import it as a CSV file from an external data medium 1 You ca also directly transfer a recipe data record from the memory medium to the PLC 4 or load it from the PLC to the storage medium In the same way you can transfer a recipe data record being shown on the display to the PLC 3
235. it is set Single value acquisition is suitable for displaying real time trends Buffered data acquisition Buffered data are read out from the PLC as an entire block every time a bit is set Buffered data acquisition is suitable for displaying history trends ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 99 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Communication areas for bit triggered trends For you to be able to configure bit triggered trends you have to set communication areas at Area Pointers in the project window and create them on the PLC The operating unit and the PLC communicate with each other via these areas e Trend request area This area can be used by the PLC to evaluate which trend is currently being displayed on the operating unit e Trend transfer area 1 This area is used to trigger the trends e Trend transfer area 2 This area is required only for trends that you configure with a switch buffer A specific trigger bit is assigned to every trend in all bit areas If for example you have assigned trigger bit 4 to a trend that trend will be identified by bit 4 in all bit areas Switch buffer A switch buffer is a second buffer which you can create for a pattern trend While the operating unit is reading the trend values from buffer 1 the PLC can already write the new values to buffer 2 When the operating unit is reading buffer 2 the PLC is writ
236. jects The objects in a project are arranged in a tree structure The left side of the project window displays object types that belong to the project and you can configure for the selected operating unit The object types contain objects with settable properties which are shown in the right section of the project window The objects that you can configure depend on the type of the operating unit The various objects are linked directly in ProTool with the tool required to edit them The project window is structured as follows e The title bar contains the project name e Depending on the operating unit the configurable object types are displayed in the left half of the window and the objects you create in the right half Eg Project std pdb iof x PC std pdb Name Type Controler Address ay Screens INT PLC_1 DB 5 DBW 194 Messages WORD PLCI DB 150 DBW 0 Recipes M11 amp J Tags Controllers REAL DB 10 DBD 0 E Scripts INT PLC_1 DB 20 DEW 0 Ge Archives Timer PLCI T20 g Tert Graphic Lists Counter C10 8 Graphics as Trends amp Scheduler Protocols 2 8 Object s 0 object s selected Example of a project window with tags Note If you maximize the project window tabs are displayed for the open windows along the bottom border to enable you to change easily from one window to another ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems
237. jects toolbar by choosing the button shown You can perform the following settings among other things e Whether you want to display just the time just the date or both e Whether the displayed data can be modified on the operating unit at run time e Whether the date should be shown in short or long form Short form forexample 24 07 98 17 09 43 Long form for example Friday July 24 1998 17 09 43 Note Use four digits for the year in the Date time object If necessary change the Regional Options settings in the operating system on your operating unit Use different separators for date and time in the Regional Settings on the Control Panel If identical or wrong separators are used changes of date or time are not applied at run time or wrong values are set To display the time you can use the digital analog clock screen object Displaying date and time on the TP 170A 5 46 Since the TP 170A does not have a battery backed system clock the system time of the PLC has to be displayed in its place To do this configure a date time tag for an input output field ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 2 18 Digital analog clock Purpose A digital analog clock gives you the option to display the system time in numbers digital or as a clock with hands analog The digital display also includes the current
238. l graphics e MS Paint all versions e MS EXCEL 2000 and XP e MS PowerPoint 2000 and XP e Paint Shop Pro 7 0 e Micrografx Designer 9 0 e Corel Draw 10 e Corel Photo Paint 9 0 We recommend you not to create graphics in Corel Photo Paint since Corel Photo Paint uses a disproportionately high amount of configuration memory e AutoSketch 7 0 Build 54 Some problems have become known with earlier versions in the meantime If you insert an Excel spreadsheet as an OLE object in your configuration and have enabled the Gridlines option in Excel the gridlines will not appear correctly on the operating unit so that you have to disable the Gridlines option This effect does not occur in Excel 2000 Using Excel and Word objects If you use Excel or Word objects in a ProTool screen you should perform subsequent modifications in the original file and then insert the modified object back into your configuration Using AutoSketch If you wish to create a new AutoSketch object create a graphics field in your ProTool configuration In the Graphic Object dialog box click New and select the New Object check box After you have twice confirmed the message that the drawing does not contain any objects that might be copied to the Clipboard AutoSketch is started as an OLE server If you wish to integrate an existing AutoSketch object start AutoSketch and open an existing graphic Select the Graphic and copy it to the Clipboard Insert th
239. lue to every symbolic entry of a tag during configuration You can configure two different types of selection field e Text The selection field consists of a text list For example you can turn a motor on and off by means of the two entries ON and OFF e Graphics The selection field consists of a graphics list This means that you can configure language independent selection lists for example ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques By using list boxes you prevent misinterpretations to a large extent since the operating unit accepts only the configured values on the text list You create a selection field for text on the open screen in the Screen lt Objects toolbar by selecting the illustrated button or by choosing Insert gt Selection Field from the menu You create a selection field for a graphic on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the illustrated button or by choosing Insert gt Graphic Selection Field from the menu Array tags You can configure array tags for input and selection fields Using an index you can address a specific input or selection field in this way You can use array tags configured for input and selection fields for mapping a recipe structure to the screen configuration too ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594
240. m message area first and then an alarm message Procedure D Procedure Left double click in the project window on Area pointers to create the alarm message area The Area Pointers dialog box is opened Insert a new area pointer 2x Available types OK Alarm Ack OP Alarm Ack PLC Alarm Messages Data Mailbox Event Messages Function Key Assig Interface Area LED Assignment Screen Number System Key Assig Trend Request Trend Transferl Trend Transfer2 User Version Here you select the Alarm Messages area pointer Click OK 3 The Alarm Messages dialog box is opened Enter the following DB 10 DW 2 Length 2 PLC PLC 1 This means you have created an alarm message area for 32 alarm messages Confirm all settings by clicking OK Double click the Alarm Messages window to open it Position the cursor at message No 2 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 150 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Enter the following message Motor temperature too high Acknowledgement 7 Print M Perform the following settings in the Attributes window The figure shows the configured alarm message Alarm Messages PRO8 pdb 1 10 20 30 40 0001 0002 tor temperature too high 0003 0004 0008 0006 0007 Erian E V Print 0008 Acknowledg 7 0009 Functions 0010 CFy 0011 nni ProTool V6 0 Se
241. mber procedure 4 diagnostic event 100 message bit procedure alarm messages StateAfter Message event 0 active cleared 1 active 2 active acknowledged cleared 3 active acknowledged 4 active cleared acknowledged Msg_Class Message class 0 no message class 1 alarm message 2 event message 3 system message 4 diagnostic event MsgNumber Message number Var1 Var8 Value of the message tag as a string TimeString Time stamp as a string that is in a readable date format MsgText Message as readable STRING PLC Message localization PLC affected Note on converting values in the Time_ms column ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 181 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 182 If you wish to process a value in another program it must be divided by 1 000 000 Example 36343476928 1 000 000 36343 476928 A date from 31 12 1899 onward is derived by calculation from the value before the decimal point The time is derived from the value following the decimal point 0 476928 Multiply by 24 to give the hours multiply any remainder by 60 to give the minutes again multiply any remainder by 60 to give the seconds any further remainder multiplied by 1000 gives milliseconds Result 07 02 1999 11 26 46 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration tech
242. mouse or the arrow keys to the desired position When it is used as a display element the position of the slider indicates a current value from the PLC i Use the analog display to display numerical values as a pointer instrument Ep SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library This is a comprehensive library i containing Graphics covering the areas of engineering and production The library contains among other things valves motors tanks conveyor belts heat exchanger units and heating devices ISA symbols ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 8 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Note The following applies to the TP 170A TP 170B and TP 270 6 If you change from one input field to another within a screen as a result of an operation thus resulting in the on screen keyboard being displayed the Exit field event for the previous field is not triggered immediately but only after the on screen keyboard has been closed ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 9 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 1 2 Libraries in ProTool Purpose Libraries are collections of preconfigured screen objects They add to the number of screen objects available and enhance the effectiveness of your configuration by repeated and multiple use of finished parts Standard libraries Once ProTool is inst
243. ms 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Display The example in the figure shows an analog display to present temperatures A typical analog display Background screen and border screen You can replace the preset background and border displays with separate screens e Background screen A user specific background screen covers the dial and the three areas marked in color on the scale The pointers pointer axis scale scale labeling and text strings for the measured quantity and unit to be displayed remain visible e Border screen A user specific border screen replaces the color default background outside the dial ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 45 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 17 Date time display Purpose Settings Use the date time display to display calendar dates and times shown on the operating unit and make them modifiable Date and time displays are language dependent It is based on the format specified by your Windows system You can also use the date time display for the input and output of tags in date time format in order to enter for example time specifications for the axis of a trend archive display For the date time display you can set a fixed start value by configuring a tag for the date time display 237 You configure a date time display on the open screen in the Screen Ob
244. n Visual Basic can be used in ProTool as functions Exhaustive Microsoft documentation on VBScript is supplied with ProTool and can be accessed from ProTool Help Only the essentials of script creation in ProTool are described here These are e Creating scripts in ProTool e Using scripts in ProTool e ProTool objects that can be used in scripts e Use of internal script tags and ProTool tags e Debugging scripts in ProTool e Constraints with VBScript Note You should read the Microsoft documentation before programming with VBScript and be clear about the consequences in ProTool VBScript not only enhances the functionality of ProTool it can also lead to unwanted errors in online operation Constructs of VBScript VBScript is a simple script language in which the following constructs are used e Tags These can be either ProTool tags or internal VBScript tags e VBScript operators such as or and e Conditional statements such as If then else Select Case e Looping through code such as Do Loop While Wend For Next For each Next e VBScript procedures such as Sub and Function e Built in VBScript procedures such as Date Sin Sqr A VBScript recognizes two types of procedure These are featured on the General tab e Subroutine e Function ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 227 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 In cont
245. n cannot be executed Restart ProTool Pro RT or ProTool Pro RT is running in Demo reinstall it mode 240004 Error during reading the standby Restart ProTool Pro RT authorization install the authorization or ProTool Pro RT is running in Demo repair the authorization see mode Commissioning Instructions Software Protection 250000 The tag in the specified line in Check the set address and Status Control is not updated because then check that the address the address configured for this tag is not has been set up in the PLC available 250001 The tag in the specified line in Check the set address Status Control is not updated because the PLC type configured for this tag is not available 250002 The tag in the specified line in Check the set address Status Control is not updated because it is not possible to map the PLC type in the tag type ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 19 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 A 20 250003 No connection could be established to the PLC The tags will not be updated 260000 A password has been entered which is unknown to the system Therefore the lowest password level has been set This corresponds to the status following Logout 260001 A password has been entered whose assigned level does not permit execution of the function The password level currently set is displayed for information purposes
246. n characters in data record names Transferring data records If you want to transfer data records you have the following options e Operating the recipe view buttons on the operating unit e PLC jobs 69 read data record from the PLC and 70 write data record to PLC e The configured functions Data_Record_DAT_to_PLC and Data_Record_PLC_to_DAT Detailed information on the data mailbox communication area can be found in the manual Recipes for Windows Based Systems Deleting data records without recipe view Using the function Delete _Data_Record you can delete data records without having to configure a recipe view The function Delete _Data_Record allows you to delete all or individual data records in a recipe When the function is triggered or terminated a system message is issued Started to delete data record or Stopped deleting data record ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 199 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 12 7 Structure of the data mailbox area pointer Principle 5 200 The data mailbox communication area is required on the PLC for the transfer of data records with synchronization The values of a data record tags are written directly to the addresses of the tags configured for the PLC Before transferring the system checks whether this transfer is allowed and issues a system message indicating whether or not error
247. n is pressed the tag is set to true a Rcd EA General Font Color Functions Postion Name Enable Selected Functions foe Evert OnButtonD own 0 x Be Set_Tine_Vatiable Parameters z Fl Other Functions Set_Time_Variable F7 Show Functions Avadable For Selectioe Bit Event Release 1 Function Reset_Bit with the tag Set_Time_Tag as the parameter When the state button is released the tag is set to false ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques C Procedure e StateButton 71x ERN x E All Funchons General Font Color Functions Postion Name Enotle Calculation Selected Functions for Event E Edit Bis Irvvett_bit OrBuncrilp 1 z E Reset_bt Bk Set_Time_Variable Apply the settings by clicking OK in each case 7 300 or S7 400 The text or graphic list of the PLC program in ASCII It can be imported into the program 126 SET_CLK 126 TP_DB 126 WriteTime_FC Define the storage area on the PLC Data_Block TP_DB TITLE DB with Date and Time tags VERSION 1 0 BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK Activate FC1 in OB1 CALL WriteTime_FC Activate SFCO SET_CLK in PLC program for true FUNCTION WriteTime_FC VOID TITLE SetTime VERSION 1 0 VAR_TEMP END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE SetTime The PLC system time is set with SFCO END_FUNCTION ProTo
248. n object of the same name in the destination project the object is pasted under a new name Note With Paste ProTool always checks the lower level objects such as the limit value tags of a tag which has been copied to ensure that existing objects are reusable If there is already an object of the same name in the destination project the object to be pasted will be renamed if necessary It is given the next available name in the destination project ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 27 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 Example Tag VAR_4 will be renamed VAR_11 if tags VAR_1 through VAR_10 already exist in the destination project What is copied You can copy the following via the Clipboard e All objects listed in the project window such as screens text or graphic lists tags etc e Objects from screens trends fields graphics etc in the screen editor e Messages and objects from messages message text fields Help text etc in the message editor e Area pointers e Global and local function key assignments An object is copied complete with its attributes and all cross referenced objects Special situations encountered during copying are reported in the system message window at Clipboard This gives you information about any objects that have not been copied or renamed for example Special situation with screens If th
249. n the download operation from the configuration computer begins For this the corresponding download option must have been selected from the configuration menu of the operating unit You will find more detailed information about setting Download mode on the operating unit in you equipment manual ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6 4 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Testing projects In the case of initial commissioning the operating unit runs up automatically in Download mode For every further download you can reboot the operating unit and call the download applet on the Start menu or configure the Change Mode function if the operating unit does not go automatically to Download mode Note If the destination device is a PC which is still without a project you must enable Download mode manually in the PC loader before the first transfer Basic procedure 1 Set the operating unit to Download mode 2 Select the memory location for the project file on the operating unit 3 Perform the Download settings on the configuration computer in ProTool 4 Download the project file from the configuration computer to the operating unit Note In the case of Serial Download you should always select the highest transfer rate possible This applies in particular to the Backup Restore function to the transfer of option packs image files or large configurations especially for initial
250. nd whether the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PU PC interface Restart the system Select a different baud rate in ProTool Pro according to subrack profile communication peer etc ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 140007 140008 140009 140010 140011 No tag updating or writing is executed because the bus profile is incorrect see 1 The following parameters could not be entered in the registry Tslot Tqui Tset MinTsdr MaxTsdr Trdy Tid1 Tid2 Gap Factor Retry Limit No tag updating or writing is executed because the configuration data is incorrect The following parameters could not be entered in the registry 0 General errors 1 Incorrect version 2 Profile cannot be entered in the registry 3 Sub network type cannot be entered in the registry 4 Target rotation time cannot be entered in the registry 5 Highest address HSA incorrect No tag updating or writing is executed because the module for the S7 communication was not found No S7 communication peer could be found because the PLC is switched off DPYT The option Is not active as the only master is set in the Control Panel under Set PU PC interface No tag updating or writing is executed because communication is interrupted Che
251. nection to the PLC has Check the PLC parameters in been interrupted There is no data ProTool Pro baud rate block exchange at present length station address Check that the cable is plugged in the PLC is operational the correct interface is used Reboot the system if the message buffer for up to four more failed tags if necessary After that the message number 290003 is issued ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 21 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 A 22 290001 An attempt has been made to assign a value to a tag which is outside the value range permitted for this type The message can be entered in the message buffer for up to four more failed tags if necessary After that the message number 290004 is issued 290002 Itis not possible to convert a value from a source format to a target format The message can be entered in the message buffer for up to four more failed tags if necessary After that the message number 290005 is issued 290003 This message is issued when message number 290000 is triggered more than five times In this case no further individual messages are generated 290004 This message is issued when message number 290001 is triggered more than five times In this case no further individual messages are generated 290005 This message is issued when message number 290002 is triggered more than five times
252. nent of the STEP 7 overall symbol the tag name testname is derived from RotAxis Speed XDirection testname for example Identical tag names are given an index starting at 1 for unique identification The index always remains the same for the tag Unsupported characters within the tag name are replaced by underscore characters _ If you have since changed a tag name applied in that in that form you are asked the next time you apply the tag name whether you would like to retain the old tag name or whether it should be adjusted to the STEP 7 symbol Applying arrays from SIMATIC STEP 7 If you are using a SIMATIC S7 300 a SIMATIC S7 400 or a SIMOTION PLC you can also apply whole arrays from SIMATIC STEP 7 in addition to tags For this you must be operating ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Note If you are using the SIMATIC 300 400 PLC driver and would like to apply arrays perform the following steps In the Symbols dialog box of the Tag dialog box select the first array element At Number of elements enter the number of elements contained in the array ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 3 8 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 3 5 How to integrate and copy STEP 7 projects Computer without SIMATIC STEP 7 Perhaps you have only installed both ProTool and SIMATIC STEP 7 on your workstation machine but would like to tak
253. nfiguration techniques Release 12 02 5 156 or amp Placeholders for message tags The following identifications are used in the attribute line Px Priority x Ax Output port number x R Relay ON or OFF D Print or do not print N 0001 T Tank1 empty A P1 AO D R V Z_BAUDR Dd TO N 0005 T Mixer full n T Valves of Tanks 1 to 3 closed A P1 AO D R ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 10 Using functions Basic principle In ProTool you can link events such as Key pressed with predefined functions If the event occurs during operation the function executes a specific action on the operating unit or the PLC For example the Select Screen Permanent function on the operating unit opens a particular project screen Event Press key i Function Select Screen a gt E Action Screen is switched Triggering a function Areas of application In general you can use functions to e Setup the project for specific processes for example to switch from one screen to another e Control the process for example to set a bit in order to switch on a motor with it e Use features of the operating unit for example to display or print out the message buffer e Perform system settings online on the operating unit for
254. nfigure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 27 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems A 28 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Abbreviations B Abbreviations Overview The meanings of the abbreviations used in this documentation are as follows ANSI AS 511 ASCII CF CPU CSV DP DSN HMI LED MP MPI OLE OP OPC PC PU RAM PLC TP TCP IP PRC American National Standards Institute Protocol of the PU interface on the SIMATIC S5 American Standard Code for Information Interchange Compact Flash Central Processing Unit Comma Separated Values Distributed I O Data Source Name Human Machine Interface Light emitting diode Multi panel Multipoint Interface SIMATIC S7 Object Linking and Embedding Operator panel OLE for Process Control Personal Computer Programming unit Random access memory memory with random access working memory Programmable logic control Touch panel Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol People s Republic of China ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 B 1 Abbreviations Release 12 02 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems B 2 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Index Index A Accessing values on the PLC Acknowledgement Acknowledgement group Acknowledging
255. ning a structure and then fill it with the individual elements the top gt down approach To do this you basically have to perform the following steps Partition the display on the operating unit Create a user interface with display elements and controls Configure tags to allow data exchange with the PLC Configure messages to receive information about the machine status or the process In addition you can configure additional objects such as scripts depending on operating unit Note If you modify and save the project several times the project file gets larger pdb Reduce the size of the file by choosing Save As from the menu This causes the file structure to be reorganized 4 6 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 5 Configuring behavior at run time Constraints Depending on the device you happen to be configuring not all options listed in the Settings dialog box will be available All the settings that are possible are listed in the table below What are the possible settings To set how the project should behave at run time and the options open to the operator you can perform the following settings at System gt Settings User version The user version identifies the version of the project OP password OPC server Display Lock Task Switching Here you enter the admini
256. niques 5 11 5 3 Structure of an archive for tags Structure Here is an example of a file for tags VarName TimeString VarValue Validity Time_ms Var_107 01 04 98 11 02 52 66 00 1 35886460322 81 Var_108 01 04 98 11 02 55 60 00 1 35886460358 73 Var_109 01 04 98 11 02 57 59 00 1 35886460381 22 The following is entered in the various columns VarName Name of the ProTool tag TimeString Time stamp as a string that is in a readable date format VarValue Value of the tag Validity Validity 1 value is valid 0 error has occurred Time_ms Time stamp as decimal value Converted required only for displaying the tag values as a trend Note on converting values in the Time_ms column If you wish to process a value in another program it must be divided by 1 000 000 Example 36343476928 1 000 000 36343 476928 A date from 31 12 1899 onward is derived by calculation from the value before the decimal point The time is derived from the value following the decimal point 0 476928 Multiply by 24 to give the hours multiply any remainder by 60 to give the minutes again multiply any remainder by 60 to give the seconds any further remainder multiplied by 1000 gives milliseconds Result 07 02 1999 11 26 46 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 183 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 11 5 4 How to display archive data with a time
257. nit even if they originate from different CPUs Information stored The CPU stores not only the time of the message but also the status active cleared acknowledged and any process parameters That information is retained until a message has been completely processed in other words until it has arrived departed and been acknowledged On the operating unit the information in the message buffer is kept even longer ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 145 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Restarting the S7 CPU When S7 CPUs are restarted it is possible though dependent on the hardware configuration of the CPUs that the CPU will delete all queued ALARM_S messages Note Earlier versions of S7 300 CPUs cannot report this restart to the operating units concerned As a consequence messages are shown as being queued on the operating unit even though the CPU has deleted them already ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 146 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 13 9 Acknowledging ALARM_S messages ALARM_S messages requiring acknowledgement When a message is acknowledged by a station on the network the CPU is immediately notified The CPU then distributes the acknowledgement to all connected stations It is only to this message that the operating unit responds in other w
258. nitiated automatically When you simulate the project for the first time the simulator starts with a new blank simulation table If you have already created a simulation table for this project this is opened 4 Enter your project specific settings in the simulation tables and save them for later simulation operations Choose File gt Save on the simulator and specify a file name for the simulation table sim In this way you can open this file at a later point of time and simulate your project once again 5 Enter the parameters for tags and area pointers of your project in the simulation table i Start the Runtime software using the icon illustrated or by choosing File gt Test gt Start Runtime from the menu Switch tasks from the simulator to the current project if you wish to observe the variation in the value ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 6 7 Testing projects Release 12 02 Note When simulating configurations for Windows CE devices not all functions can be simulated such as contrast settings Scripts can be simulated but their behavior might be exactly the same as that on the real device It must similarly be remembered that the run time behavior in the simulation is not the same as the run time behavior on the actual destination device Simulation table Tags 6 8 C Tea psta ferent ret wie fe Sn Ste nro mer
259. not be converted Note If a project is converted from a graphics device to a 6 inch Windows CE device the maximum number of visible list elements in a symbolic selection field should be changed to six This ensures a neat display in every viewing position Note You will find more information about converting projects in the documentation called Configuration support for upgrading migration to Windows based devices Projektierungsunterstutzung f r Umsteiger Migration zu Windows basierten Geraten Settings for conversion You can influence the conversion result by choosing File gt Convert gt Settings e Smoothing If the Smooth setting is enabled an anti alias filter for replacing missing pixels due to interpolation is used when increasing or decreasing the size of a graphic This setting results in softer transitions in photo realistic displays In the case of drawings the display quality is enhanced when zooming out of graphics in particular since the complete screen information is retained e Converting resolution Select this setting if you would like to convert projects between different operating units having different resolutions or display sizes ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 22 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 11 2 Key assignment when converting Mapping keys when converting projects This table provi
260. nowledgement Communication areas Edit Edit alarm messages Overview Properties Structure Use of resources Messages classes in ProTool Minutes Move screen objects Multilingual projects Multiplex tag Multiplexing tags N Notes on the configuration computer 2 4 O Objects in the project window ODBC On screen keyboard Operating unit Operator panel Optimize System resources Optimizing system resources Optimum creation of graphics Options for configuring archives Output field Display date Display time Overview Output fields for graphics lists Output fields for text lists Overview of area pointers P Page number screen object Page numbers in reports Password administration Password hierarchy Password level Password lists ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Index Passwords Pattern trend Peculiarities with conversion functions PLC Select driver PLC data types PLC drivers Print Project data Print messages Printing example Printing ALARM_S messages Printing message archive in a report 5 106 Printing messages Printing messages in a report Printing project data Printing recipes in a report Procedure function example Procedure sub example Process data Project 4 6 Convert Converting an MP370 for PC example Create fundamentals of creating Test Upload Project colors Project data Project Info P
261. ns available to you in ProTool for editing tag values Basically the contents of tags can be modified as follows e By setting individual tag bits Functions for bit operations are set if you want to switch between two states for example to turn a switch on or off or to open or close a valve e By modifying the value of the complete tag Value changes of the entire tag are used if you have to switch between more than two states for example between several languages or process freely selectable values for example to enter a volume e By linearly converting the value of a tag Linear calculations are used to scale values or to render them relative to an alternative quantity ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 81 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 3 9 Functions to set tags bit by bit Usage A typical requirement for an operating unit interface is to turn a switch on or off or to open or close a valve When configuring the interface this type of process can be reduced to setting binary states the switch can either be set to ON or OFF the valve is either open or closed The classic approach is to control such tasks using BOOL tags where the single bit either has the value FALSE 0 or TRUE 1 With PLCs which do not use BOOL tags for example SIMATIC S5 or where only limited memory is available you can also edit tags bit by bit to control bin
262. ns having the Direct Key function The DP direct key function is triggered irrespective of the password level configured on the button when the button is operated Do not use password protection for buttons having the Direct Key function Using the Direct Key function 5 38 When you configure a button with the Direct Key function a fixed area of the touch display is reserved for direct key operation Graphic elements that are located above the button having the Direct Key function in this area at run time visually conceal the button but operation of the touch display at this point will nevertheless result in the Direct Key function being triggered Warning Unintentional actions on the system can be initiated by operating the button and might possibly result in persons being endangered or in material damage The following points have to be taken into account to avoid this problem e When configuring screens graphic elements must not conceal the button containing the Direct Key function e Dynamic updating of the position or the display enable of a graphic object as a function of process values must not result in the button having the Direct Key function being concealed at run time It is essential for these requirements to be taken into account by the configuring engineer Existing configurations must be modified without delay if necessary The problem described above does not occur in the following cases if
263. ntents of the report in the report editor You can include the following objects in your report Object name eserinton U i external graphics programs in your report Al Text You can use the text field to include static text in the report Various formats are possible You can present text in various fonts for example enter text on more than one line and align it vertically or horizontally Output field Using the output field you can display process values Different display formats for example decimal and binary are possible Output fields can be formatted such as 3D effects colors etc Symbolic output field A symbolic output field shows text or a graphic instead of a numerical value Example Instead of the values 0 and 1 you can output the texts Motor OFF and Motor ON in the report Page number The corresponding number of pages is output at the point you paste this symbol in a report If you have put a cover sheet at the front of the report a page number will not appear on it 237 Date Time You can incorporate the system time in your report using Date Time Viewing a graphic With the graphic view you can dynamically position graphics from other graphics programs in your project The current status of the graphic is then mapped to the report Graphic list The graphics list displays a graphic from a list to make the current process status more comprehensible Example Instead of the values 0 and 1
264. ntervals If the message appears more frequently Restart the operating unit 180002 The screen keyboard could not be If Windows 95 is not activated available Possible causes Install the runtime software The screen keyboard is not generally 9 supported under Windows 95 The file TouchInputPC exe was not registered due to an incorrectly executed Setup 190000 Itis possible that the tag will not be updated 190001 The tag is updated following an error status after the cause of the last error state has been eliminated return to normal operation 190002 The tag is not updated because Switch on communication via communication to the PLC has been the function Set Online switched off 190004 The tag is not updated because the Check the configuration configured address is not available for this tag 190005 The tag is not updated because the Check the configuration configured PLC type does not exist for this tag 190006 The tag is not updated because it is not Check the configuration possible to map the PLC type in the tag type 190007 The tag values are not modified because Switch Online or re establish the connection to the PLC has been connection to the PLC terminated or the tag is offline 190008 The threshold values configured for the Observe the configured or tag have been violated e g by current threshold value of the an entered value tag a function
265. ntrol tag on the same screen Declare the screen to be your start screen in the project and compile the project Start ProTool Runtime ProTool Pro RT appears on the screen Enter the value 1 in the input field The coolant pump starts flashing Note If you enable flashing on the Color tab and on the Attributes tab the setting enabled at Attributes takes precedence ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 19 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 Configuring display elements and controls Purpose of display elements The operator uses display elements to monitor the machine or the system on the operating unit You can view current information such as actual values from the PLC process and operating modes and malfunctions on the operating unit as a numerical value in plain language or as a graphic Purpose of controls The operator uses controls on the operating unit to intervene directly in the process He uses them for example to specify setpoints trigger functions open screens and acknowledge messages You can assign a password level to controls in order to prevent operation by unauthorized persons Display elements in ProTool Two types of display element are available in ProTool 5 20 Static display elements Static display elements are pieces of text and graphics that are not linked to the PLC They do not react to user inputs
266. o not specify a display class in SIMATIC STEP 7 the message concerned is automatically assigned to display class 0 Selecting display classes In ProTool you can specify which display classes are to be displayed on the operating unit being configured You make your selection by choosing System gt Messages gt Settings from the menu You will find a detailed description in Setting the message procedure and selecting the display classes If you do not make a selection all display classes display classes 0 to 15 are displayed as the default ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 137 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 13 4 Setting the message procedure and selecting the display classes Principle 5 138 To specify the message procedure s you are intending to use go to the Message Settings dialog box To access this dialog box choose System gt Messages gt Settings from the menu Message Settings ra ore Mesaneevettbediced FT x I ke Enaisch USA m i Select the required message procedures from the lower part of the dialog box Once you have selected ALARM_S you can use the Alarm_S button to set the messages that will be displayed on the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration
267. obtain information about a project when projects change or are adapted open the Project Information dialog box To do so choose File gt Project Information from the menu The Project Information dialog box displays general project data and the memory requirements for the project Project information is spread according to subjects over three tab controls e General e Description e Statistics Project Info Example relating to the Statistics tab ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 37 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 General The General tab shows information on the device type project name path name of the stored project file and person who created the project You fill in the Created by field and all the other fields are updated automatically by ProTool when the project is saved Description The Description tab contains an input field for the project description Here you can enter any information you like that are important for your project Statistics The Statistics tab shows when the project was created modified generated and downloaded the ProTool version last used to edit the project and the memory required by the project after it has been downloaded to the flash memory on the operating unit The memory requirement is determined and displayed after every download operation ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User
268. ocally and globally Depending on whether it is a case of function keys soft keys or soft keys with LEDs the display can vary slightly from the representation Special feature upon change of screen The following special points apply since the key assignment changes after a change of screens e All functions are executed immediately on leaving the screen when the event Release key occurs even when the key is still pressed e When the function Set Bit When Key Is Pressed is configured for a function key the bit is reset immediately on exiting the screen ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 29 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 2 6 Trend view Purpose A trend view is a dynamic display element Trend views make possible a particularly lucid form of continuous display of process data on the operating unit You can display several different trends simultaneously in one trend view on the operating unit You configure a trend view on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the button shown 5 2 7 Bit trigger functions Principle 5 30 When a screen containing a trend view with one or more bit triggered trends is opened on the operating unit the operating unit sets the bits assigned to the individual trends in the trend request area in each case From the bits set the PLC can evaluate which trends are currently being displaye
269. ocated in the tags on the data medium The storage location is defined when you configure the recipe in the recipe editor Properties button Data Medium tab Save Data Record As As Save Data Record However the operator has the option of changing the current data record name or selecting an existing data record name Delete Data Record The operator uses this button to delete from the data medium the data record displayed on the operating unit for the currently set recipe ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Buton Pupos OOOO 4 Synchronize Data Record The operator uses this button to establish consistency between the Synchronize recipe view and the tags The modified values of the tags are written from the table to the appropriate tags Following that all values are read from the tags and updated in the table Write Data Record to PLC The operator uses this button to write the current data record from the tags to the PLC Read Data Record from PLC The operator uses this button to read the data record for the From PLC currently set recipe from the PLC and display the values on the operating unit Note In ProTool 5 2 the data in the recipe view were used for the actions Save and Download to PLC These data are not always up to date however In ProTool 6 0 the data in the tags a
270. ocedure Elcreate a new tag with the following settings for the input field 7 300 or S7 400 Name Date_and_Time_Tagl Type DATE AND TIME Acquisition cycle s 0 5 Area DB DB 1 DBB 8 7 200 Name Date_and_Time_Tagl Type STRING Length 17 Acquisition cycle s 0 5 Area V VB 317 Tag General Limit values Functions Options Name Date_and Time Variable ss PLE Pci is s J Range lv Type STRING VB 317 Length Byte fiz Acquisition Cycle s fo 5 Apply the settings by clicking OK ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 56 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques CO poea SSS A Lint values Set_Time_Variable Create a tag with the following settings 7 300 or S7 400 Name Set_Time_Tag Type BOOL Acquisition cycle s 0 5 Area DB DB 1 DBX 16 0 7 200 Name Set_Time_Tag Type BOOL Acquisition cycle s 0 5 Area V V 335 Bit o ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 57 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 58 Apply the settings by clicking OK ar Insert a state button with the following settings Type Pushbutton Text Set Time Configure the following functions for the state button Event Press 1 Function Set_Bit with the tag Set_Time_Tag as the parameter When the state butto
271. ocess Check whether access has is stopped been made to the correct file Modify the file attributes if necessary ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 9 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 130006 No access to file is possible The process is stopped Check for example whether access has been made to the correct file the file exists a different action prevents simultaneous access to the file 140000 Online connection to the PLC has been successfully established 140001 Online connection to the PLC has been disconnected 140003 No tag updating or writing is executed 140004 No tag updating or writing is executed because the access point or the subrack configuration is incorrect 140005 No tag updating or writing is executed because the address of the operating unit is incorrect possibly too high 140006 No tag updating or writing is executed because the baud rate is incorrect Check the connection and whether the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PU PC interface Restart the system Check the connection and whether the PLC is switched on Check the access point or the subrack configuration MPI PPI PROFIBUS in the Control Panel with Set PU PC interface Restart the system Use a different operating unit address Check the connection a
272. of the operating unit If there is no memory card on the external device the download operation is terminated All data relevant to the project are transferred before this happens however so that Runtime can be started with the downloaded project data Note For Windows based devices a memory card is required for storing the pdz file You should use this option preferably for small and medium sized configurations in order to keep transfer time short There is the following option for large project files Transfer the project file as a condensed arj file with the Backup function of Project Manager to CF card for example Before you do this switch your project to Stand alone mode as necessary if you are working with ProTool integrated in STEP7 To do this operate the Switch ProTool integration in STEP7 button in ProTool Setup ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 6 11 Testing projects Release 12 02 6 6 Directly accessing values on the PLC Status Force tag Purpose At run time you can have direct access to the connected PLC and I O from the operating unit to read and write values This means you can easily use the operating unit to monitor and control the operands of the PLC program without also having to connect a programming device or PC to the PLC This is very advantageous particularly during the testing and commissioning phase of your project
273. ol V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 59 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 7 200 Activate SBR1 Enter_Time in the PLC program for true SUBROUTINE_BLOCK Enter_Time SBR1 BEGIN NETWORK 1 Time entry on TP 170A as 1 STRING tag INB 317 length 17 HOR Time entry on TP 170A as 2 STRING tags II II ATH VB317 VB209 2 Convert day to STRING ATH VB320 VB208 2 Convert month to STRING ATH VB323 VB207 2 Convert year to STRING ATH VB326 VB210 2 Convert hour to STRING ATH VB329 VB211 2 Convert minute to STRING ATH VB332 VB212 2 Convert second to STRING TODW VB207 Read Date Time END_SUBROUTINE_BLOCK Note Alternatively you can update the system time immediately after your input Configure the function Set_Bit for the Value Change event of the Date and Time Tag1 tag If the Value Change event occurs the SetTimeVariable bit is set After SFCO S7 300 or S7 400 or SBR_1 S7 200 has been initiated the SetTimeVariable must be reset since system functionality will otherwise be impaired ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 60 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Result Click Set Time to apply the date and time from the input field as the new CPU system time ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5
274. ollowing e Perform backup restore e Perform communication settings e Set date and time e Configure the input panel on screen keyboard e Configure keyboard and mouse settings e Configure network settings e Set the printer e Format the FLASH memory e Perform device specific settings for example brightness and calibration of touch panels e Perform Download settings e Set the screen saver To make it easy to call the Windows CE Control Panel you can provide a relevant control in your ProTool project In all other cases the Control Panel can only be opened from the Start menu while the device is starting up We recommend that you protect selection of this control by means of a password so that it is only accessible to service personnel In this way you stop an operator from changing the basic settings of the operating unit by mistake Note You can also protect all the controls intended for service purposes configure them on a separate screen and protect selection of this screen by means of a password ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Testing projects Example application Displaying S7 settings The Windows CE Control Panel requires the service personnel when a new device for example on an MPlbus is integrated into a system to which several devices have already been connected In this case it is probable that the default MPI add
275. omponents of a message Message structure A message consists of e Message number e Message text e Message tag e Help text The following messages are displayed on the operating unit but cannot be edited in ProTool e The message cannot be modified in system messages standard diagnostic results S7 system messages and technological alarms SIMOTION e Message numbers of user defined diagnostic results can be freely defined in SIMATIC STEP 7 within certain limits e The message number is assigned in SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMOTION SCOUT for Alarm_S messages Message number The message number is used to reference a message In ProTool you have a free choice of message number within the range 0 to 2000 and message text The message number is structured in a specific structure It consists of a number which is a CPU wide unique number and specification of the message type The message type is not displayed on the device You will only see the number on the screen Note It is possible for two identical numbers to be displayed for different messages The causes of this could be as follows The displayed number was assigned for several message types The message number was assigned on different CPUs for different messages On RMOS devices there is no CPU identification of messages Message text Message text contains the description of a message The length of the message text depends on the operating unit The numbe
276. on you can then specify such effects as flashing text and define additional information ALARM_S messages are not configured in ProTool but e For SIMATIC S7 300 400 CPUs in SIMATIC STEP 7 Configuration using S7 PDIAG Configuration in S7 GRAPH or S7 HiGraph Call these using SFC17 SFC18 Note Diagnostic events generated in the S7 CPU by SFC52 are not supported by ProTool Pro RT and are not displayed on the operating unit e For SIMOTION CPUs with SIMOTION SCOUT The advantage of this is that the messages are configured just once and are then available throughout the project for all operating units and can be displayed You can find detailed reference information about the procedure in the online Help in SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMOTION SCOUT and in the relevant option packages Advantages of ALARM_S As compared with the message bit procedure ALARM_S has the following advantages e ALARM_S is an active message procedure When a message is issued the CPU actively notifies all networked units The operating unit is relieved of the task of continually polling the message area e The process data always precisely reflect the situation at the time of the message This cannot be guaranteed with the message bit procedure e The time stamp precisely indicates when an event occurred even if the operating unit is not connected until a later time Messages of Report System Error SFM type 5 134 S7 components and DP standard sla
277. on the on screen keyboard where the deviating characters are located There are two options to choose from for entering a language specific character e Orientate yourself on the on screen keyboard and enter the character on the keyboard of the configuration computer e Click your mouse to enter the character directly via the on screen keyboard French France ProT ool Standard altel Io gaje TTL ffl Tsy Te fale ea fafa fi aoa a e aA e T Example of language dependent on screen keyboard with French as the editing language The on screen keyboard is hidden automatically as soon as you reset the editing language back to the current Windows language You can also enable and disable display of the on screen keyboard by choosing View gt Keyboard You can also directly start the on screen keyboard on the operating unit as a stand alone application The following parameters are available for the executable file TouchInputPC exe e NumPadOff starts the alphanumeric keyboard default e NumPadOn starts the numeric keyboard e Nolnfo starts the keyboard without Copyright notice e Close closes the open keyboard ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Sizing You can size the on screen keyboard displayed on PC systems 1 Double click on the keyboard icon on the taskbar This displays the ProTool Input Panel Op
278. on touch devices Configure a border for the field or select a background color that is different from the background color of the current screen In this way the touch sensitive area of the field can always be recognized on the operating unit Help text is particularly helpful with input fields and input output fields since the assignment of input field to input window on the touch device is not always directly evident from the position of the input window ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 10 Functions to provide support for service work Purpose In your project you should provide controls to make service work easier on startup and during operation It is advisable to configure these controls in a separate screen with their selection protected by a password In this way you prevent operators who are not service personnel changing basic settings by mistake Functions for service work The following tasks when starting up a project or when the project is running can be simplified by using functions e Opening the Windows CE Control Panel The service technician can use the Windows CE Control Panel to set the printer and data and time or configure the network card e Changing modes At project run time the operating mode is usually set to Online In order to test a new project first without a connection to the P
279. onfigure access protection Configuring a recipe view example Configuring alarm message area example Configuring alarm messages example 5 150 Configuring archives Configuring behavior at run time Configuring color change Configuring control elements Configuring display elements Configuring message editing Configuring message texts for ALARM_S ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Index Release 12 02 Configuring multiplex tags example Configuring operator prompting 5 212 Configuring password lists 5 225 Configuring the date and time for Panels 5 48 Configuring the date and time for XP170B example Connecting to STEP 7 Lite Constraints Constraints on projects in Asian languages Constraints with Asian languages Constraints with printing Constraints with VBScript Contents of message buffers Control elements Control Panel Conversion functions Convert Key assignment Convert a project Convertible projects Converting tags linearly Copy Copying objects Between projects and within a project Copying objects within a project Copying projects Copying projects from SIMATIC STEP 7 Create a project Creating archives for messages example Creating area pointers Creating icons for function keys Creating recipes example Creating reports Cross Reference Cross reference overview D Data mailbox Data mailbox area pointer Data r
280. ons button 3 Inthe Messages dialog box for the Edit Message event configure the required function for example selecting a screen in which the operator can make a meaningful response to the message ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 11 Contents of message buffers Definition A message buffer is a memory area in the main memory of the operating unit in which message events are stored in chronological order The message buffer is a FIFO buffer of a given size and is not configured The size of the message buffer depends on the device Note When the operating unit is powered down the contents of the message buffer are deleted To keep your messages available for a longer period of time you have to archive them Displaying the message buffer The message buffer contains all the message events of alarm messages or event messages You must configure a control in order to display the alarm message buffer and the event message buffer To structure the message buffer more clearly and at the same time reduce the load on the system you can configure controls which allow the user to delete all or part of the message buffer Data storage in message buffer Every message event is stored with the following information e Message number e Time stamp consisting of time and date e Identification of the event
281. ontents Release 12 02 viii Settings for an Archive 2 ccccccesesceedeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeedeneeedeceneeeeedeneeess Displaying archive data in a specified time WindOw 0cee Options for configuring archives ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeteeeeee Examples of using archives ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas How to create an archive for messages ccceeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeenteeeeeeaes Structure of an archive for MESSAGES cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeettteeeeeee Structure of an archive for taQs eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenaeees How to display archive data with a time Window s es Creating TOCIPCS ic nren A AAA Using and configuring recipes ssesssesssssesesrreseernesesnnasnnnaatannaaennnannan Recipe VIGW 2 iiaiai s eerd aa a iada a E aA ada a AA aE a E AE Recipe SCHEIN niscai einan iana alaaa eana aa aaa a Coniguning recipes cossos i a a a Synchronization with the PLC sssiiersainsirseirnarsnininsrnaniiian rania aannaa Editing data reCOrds aesan Structure of the data mailbox area pointer ccceeeeeteeeeeees Compatibility Of reCiP S eee ee cececcececeeeeeeneceeceeeeeeeeecneaeeeeeeeeetenaees Examples and scenarios for creating and configuring a recipe How to create a reCipe ccccccceceeeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeseeeeaeeeceeeeeseeeenanaeenes How to configure a recipe ViCW ceececcceceeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeena
282. opened in order to prevent unintentional overlapping of buttons and input fields Dimension the controls such as buttons large enough for them to be operated properly For display elements such as output fields use font sizes that are large enough to allow comfortable reading The figure shows an example of screen partitioning on the TP 170B Global button Fixed window Message indicator Input field Basic area Local button Example of screen partitioning on the TP 170B Global buttons Position buttons which you want to be available globally in every operating situation in the fixed window Buttons in the basic area and their assigned functions are available only locally on the screen concerned Overlapping controls Mutual overlapping of control elements can result in undefined operating states and ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 17 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 On screen keyboard To read in values the touch device automatically displays an on screen keyboard as soon as the operator touches an input field for example The keyboard is automatically hidden when the input is terminated Depending on the configured input field the on screen keyboard features keys for purely numerical input or for entering alphanumeric characters Special features of touch devices 4 18 Input fields and input output fields are touch sensitive
283. or read out from it Configuration options with recipes 5 188 In recipe properties you can control the recipe tag properties on the Options tab The figure shows the basic differences when working with data records and the effect of the options Synchronize and Offline Recipe management Storage Recipe view recipe screen medium Yes No Synchronize D Tags No X Yes Offline The Synchronize and Offline options when editing data records 1 Recipe without Synchronize Tags The data of a data record which has been read is only displayed in the recipe view table and can also only be edited in the recipe view If you use the same tags outside the recipe view this does not affect their values ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 2 Recipe with Synchronize Tag and with Offline With the Synchronize Tags option you specify that the data of a data record which has been read from the PLC or storage medium has been written to the tags or has been read from the tags you configured for the recipe The Offline option ensures that the entered data are only saved in the tags but not transferred directly to the PLC on being input 3 Recipe with Synchronize Tag and without Offline As 2 above However entered or read in data are immediately transferred to the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack
284. or which you create your project you can partition the display into different areas These areas can either be moved message area and message indicator or they are immobile fixed window icons for function keys Where do you set the areas Choose System gt Screen Keys to set the areas The settings made here apply to the whole project So set the areas before you begin configuration to the extent possible The example below shows one possible way of partitioning the display Fixed window Message Message area indicator Basic area ptt tt tf iens Example of partitioning the display on the SIMATIC Panel PC Basic area The basic area is the entire screen area without the fixed window If you change the size of the fixed window the size of the basic area automatically changes as well All the other areas are superimposed on parts of the basic area You configure process screens in the basic area This means that the contents of the basic area changes for each screen you call ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 14 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects Fixed window The fixed window is a window that is always displayed It uses up part of the basic area You can enable and disable the fixed window by choosing System gt Screen Keys from the menu If it is switched on it is displayed during screen configuration and thus redu
285. ords Error messages during compilation Error messages while downloading Events for triggering functions Example of a function Example of a function example Example of a subroutinee example Exchanging text with translators Exchanging texts F Fields Filter messages Filtering messages Fixed window Flashing Flashing fields Fonts Force VAR Foreign languages Export import System requirements Full Screen mode Function example Function key Assign after conversion Function keys Function parameters Functions Archive Change tags For messages For service work Single bit setting of tags Functions for the linear scaling of tags 5 84 Functions to change tag values Functions to change the value of a tag Functions to set tags bit by bit Fundamental considerations when 5 81 5 83 5 84 9115 ae a creating a project 4 2 G Getting started Getting started with Protool 2 3 Global function key Graphic displays Graphic lists Graphics Bar graph Overview Trends H Help texts in messages Hiding objects Hours How to create a customized printout example How to create a printout example SEE 9 47 Import Text for translation Incorporating ALARM_S messages Information about the project Input field Enter date Enter time Overview Input field for concealed password entry Input field for password entry Input fields Instance DB 3 1 Integrated operation Leg Integrating and unintegrating
286. ords only at this point does it enter the acknowledgement in the message buffer Note The CPU issues a time stamp for the acknowledgement event but does not store it Later it is no longer possible to determine if and when a message has been acknowledged ALARM_S messages not requiring acknowledgement Certain ALARM_S messages are configured as alarm messages but do not require explicit acknowledgement by the user the CPU acknowledges such a message automatically when it arrives Message overload on the operating unit In the event of a communication bottleneck in the CPU multiple arrival and departure of an ALARM_S message could not be acquired a message might be displayed as not acknowledged on the operating unit even though it has been acknowledged in the CPU already The problem occurs only if simultaneously with a message e A communication bottleneck occurs in the CPU e The message in the CPU arrives e The message is acknowledged by the operating unit The operator must then acknowledge the messages several times on the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 147 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 13 10 Printing ALARM_S messages Principle You specify which messages are to be output to a printer in the usual way in ProTool by choosing System gt Messages gt Settings from the menu Message Logging If you do not
287. out either a value or the entire buffer This data area is required when you configure trends with a switch buffer The data area is structured in the same way as the trend transfer 1 data area The PLC can use this area pointer to drive the light emitting diodes on the function keys of the operating unit The operating unit uses this area pointer to indicate to the PLC which alarm messages have been acknowledged on the operating unit PLC Acknowledgement Messages can be acknowledged from the PLC using this area You can configure an alarm message for each bit in this data area The bits are assigned to the message numbers in ascending order As soon as the PLC sets a bit in this data area the operating unit recognizes that the assigned alarm message has arrived Conversely the operating unit interprets the message as departed after the bit is reset on the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects Note The following applies to the Coordination area pointer You can configure more than one Coordination area pointer in ProTool 5 2 SP3 or higher ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 8 Screen partitioning on the operating unit Display areas Depending on the operating unit f
288. overview over e the ProTool project structure e the procedure for creating a project e copying objects e displaying project information ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 1 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 1 Fundamental considerations when creating a project Objective You want to make it possible to operate and visualize a machine or process To do this you map the machine or process on the operating unit as accurately as is necessary System configuration Communication takes place between the operating unit and the machine or process by means of tags via the PLC The value of a tag is written to a memory area address on the PLC from where it is read by the operating unit The following diagram provides an overview of the fundamental structure Communication by means of tags PLC Machine process A typical structure ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 2 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects Defining an operating philosophy Consider which process values or states of the machine you want to display on the operating unit or work with and which object types you will have to configure for the purpose 1 Create a user interface Screens are the central components of the project with which you visualize the states of the machine or process and create the
289. ox This will mean that the data of a data record which has been read is only displayed in the recipe view table and can only be edited in the recipe view If you use the same tags in screens as well this does not affect their values Create the data mail box communication area at Area pointer in the project window Click the OK and set the address The length is fixed at 5 Area DB100 DBW 0 Make sure that you create data block 100 with a length of at least 5 data words in your PLC program as well On the Data Medium tab enter C TEMP REC as the path name ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 9 2 How to configure a recipe view Task In this example you configure the recipe view for the mixing unit of a fruit juice system You transfer the project file to the PLC create a data record and transfer it to the PLC Configuring the recipe view C poea OOOO S 1 2 On a screen configure the recipe view screen object with the following buttons New Save Delete From PLC and To PLC At Data record select the settings Display table and Allow edit Transferring a project file to the operating unit O posar OOOO E Establish a physical connection with the operating unit Transfer the project to the operating unit Creating a data record on the operating unit E Procedure Select the
290. p to 16 acknowledgement groups The value 0 or a blank Acknowledgement field signifies that an acknowledgement applies only to that alarm message single acknowledgment Acknowledgement hierarchy of message views If several message views are displayed simultaneously on the operating unit and the operator acknowledges queued alarm messages the acknowledgement affects the different message views in the hierarchical order 1 Message view with focus dotted rectangle 2 Alarm message window 3 Message line 4 Message view in the fixed screen 5 Message view in the main screen ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 116 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 5 Settings for message classes Configurable properties You can configure the following parameters for message classes e Acknowledgement e Printout e Archiving e Filter Acknowledgement Messages classified as alarm messages have to be acknowledged Alarm messages are displayed until they are acknowledged e Individual acknowledgement When you acknowledge a message only that particular message is acknowledged e Group acknowledgement When you acknowledge one message belonging to an acknowledgement group all the queued messages of that group are acknowledged as well Printout Printout is enabled for all messages if you have selected the Print attribute in the Message Settings
291. quality is enhanced when zooming out of graphics in particular since the complete screen information is retained Color presentation on the operating unit With pixel graphics if you notice differences between the colors displayed on the operating unit and those configured in ProTool proceed as follows On the configuration computer choose on the Start menu Settings gt Control Panel gt Display and on the Settings tab select at Colors the setting True Color Retain this setting for configuring and compiling the project ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 95 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 5 1 Making optimum use of graphics Optimizing graphic applications It may take a relatively long time to load and save projects especially if you use a large number of Designer Corel Photo Paint or Corel Draw graphics Save As Save at Save As from time to time This optimizes data storage and makes the pdb file smaller Graphics editor Avoid large numbers of Designer Corel Photo Paint and Corel Draw graphics Program sections of these editors are used when graphics are processed Some of these editors are very slow The best times are achieved with Paint Reduce the color depth The memory requirements for graphics increases in proportion to the number of colors you use Therefore use only the absolutely essential color availability
292. r Position Here you define the appearance of the recipe printout e Name You can use this name to identify the recipe printout ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 107 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 8 3 Page numbers in reports Purpose 5 108 This object is used to output page numbers in a report for example in the header or footer During printing the number of the report page concerned is inserted at the position where you pasted Page Number If you have put a cover sheet at the front of the report a page number will not appear on it f To configure page numbers for a report select the illustrated symbol in the report editor Set how the page number is formatted on the tabs of the Properties dialog box ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 8 4 Example of creating reports The example shows you how to create a report with a custom layout automatic insertion of the date and contents of the message buffer and to have it printed automatically at certain times of the day 5 8 4 1 How to create a report Objective Procedure Suppose you want to create a report containing a title underscored with a bar the date and time of output and the contents of the System Messages buffer You want the report to be issued at 6 a m each day
293. r Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 280001 No more data is read or written Check that the cable is Possible causes plugged in the PLC is The cable is defective operational the correct interface is used The PLC does not respond is Reboot the system if the defective etc system message is displayed Connection is established via the wrong continuously interface The system is overloaded 280002 A connection is used which requires a function module in the PLC The function block has replied Communication can now proceed 280003 A connection is used which requires a Check that the cable is function module in the PLC plugged in the PLC is The function block does not reply operational the correct interface is used Reboot the system if the system message is displayed continuously The remedy is dependent on the error code 1 The function block must set the COM bit in the response container 2 The function block may not set the ERROR bit in the response container 3 The function block must respond within the specified time timeout 4 Establish an online connection to the PLC system message is displayed continuously 290000 The tag could not be read or written It is Check in the configuration assigned the start value that the address has been set The message can be entered in the up in the PLC 280004 The online con
294. r of characters per line is marked by this character A at the top border of the window during configuration Alarm Messages PROS 1 10 000 A ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 113 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 By choosing Edit gt Style from the menu you can select the following styles for example for the message text depending on the operating unit flashing underscore italic Note You can also configure operator instructions as a message Message tags A message can contain output fields with tags They are also referred to as message tags By choosing Edit gt Style from the menu you can select from the following styles for output fields depending on the operating unit flashing underscore italic F Insert an output field by selecting the symbol illustrated Note The values of message tags in the message buffer are updated upon all events active cleared and acknowledged Help text Help text containing further details on a message can be configured for every message Help text is displayed for the operator in a separate window on the operating unit by pressing the HELP key Enter Help text by selecting the symbol illustrated or by using the menu command View gt Help Text Other message components 5 114 When configuring message views for certain devices other message
295. r operator control ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 82 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 10 Functions to change the value of a tag Usage Value changes of the entire tag are used for the configuration if you have to switch between more than two settings for example between several languages or process freely selectable values for example to enter a volume Functions You can use the following functions to change the entire value of a tag Set Value A specific value is Set the start value for a assigned to a tag process Decrease Value The value of a tag is Gradual up and down Increase Value reduced or increased adjustment by a specific amount You will find an example of using these functions in the topic called Configuring stepping switches ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 83 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 3 11 Functions for the linear scaling of tags Usage With many projects it is simpler for the operator to enter the values of a tag ina different unit to that used by the PLC In this case you can scale the entered tag values automatically before they are transferred to the PLC Set this automatic scaling as a tag property on the Scaling tab If you want to access the scaled value in your project for example to output it you need a second ta
296. r translation Perform language settings Copy or move ProTool projects Archive and unarchive ProTool projects as part of SIMATIC STEP 7 projects For further information refer to the documentation on SIMATIC Manager Note ProTool s Project Manager is not available to you in the event of integrated operation ProTool data can no longer be viewed independently in this event since the data is always linked to a STEP 7 project It therefore has to be managed and backed up using this application 3 6 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 3 3 Working with SIMATIC Manager Advantages You can deal with many tasks more efficiently in SIMATIC Manager than in ProTool Since there is a separate documentation for SIMATIC Manager only a short summary will be presented here of the menu commands available to you for your ProTool projects in SIMATIC Manager For further information refer to the documentation on SIMATIC Manager Compile a project Choose Edit gt Compile from the menu Download a project to an Choose System gt Load from the menu operating unit or System gt Load from the station shortcut menu or click Start ProTool RT Choose Edit gt Start Runtime from the menu Export and import blocks of Choose Options gt Manage Multilingual Text gt text for translation Import or Export
297. r window on the screen e Windows CE devices The position can be set on the operating unit on the Control Panel in Windows CE ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 215 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 13 3 Icons for local function keys Purpose Icons are fixed size pixel graphics that are placed in the immediate vicinity of screen specific function keys soft keys This means that you can illustrate the function of a locally assigned function key Icons can only be assigned to soft keys that border on the screen of the operating unit You can prevent incorrect operation of a key to a large extent by means of an informative icon Note Not possible on a standard PC 5 13 4 Showing and hiding objects Purpose Index tag 5 216 ProTool features an option of displaying and hiding controls and display elements at run time For example you can hide an output field on the operating unit when the actual value is within the specified setpoint range Alternatively display an input field only when an operator input is expected for the control in a specific situation for example during startup The user interface of your operating unit remains neat and tidy in this manner You can either link display and hiding to a constant range of values or to the tag of an input output field for instance You can influence several input output fields simultaneou
298. ra cere Sa VARI UNT 0000 0000 C Bin 0 Sine 0000 0000 1111111110 000 7 VAR_2 INT 0000 0000 C Bin ri Random 1000 0000 0111 1111 C vaR_3 INT i Dez 2 0 Increment 32768 32767 10 000 VAR4 REAL 0 Dez 10 0 eDisplay gt i i io vaR_S INT 0000 Hex 2 0 Shitt bit m VARF NT 0000 iHex 40 Decrement 8000 TFFF 1000 O Event mesUINT 0000 0000 C Bin 1 0 Shift bit C Alarm mes INT 0000 0000 C Bin 1 0 Shift bit 0000 0000 Q wv B Piz Example of a simulation table All settings that you perform in this table for the simulation of your project can be saved in a file For this choose File gt Save on the simulator and specify a file name sim In this way you can simulate your project once again at a later point of time using the saved settings A condition is that you will not have changed the tags and area pointers to be simulated in your project in the meantime Featured tags Not all configured tags are featured in the simulation table Only referenced tags are available for simulation meaning only the tags that are used in your project in a screen object for example Archive tags To be able to simulate archive tags select the Read Continuously option while configuring the tags in the Tag dialog box on the Options tab Tags in messages Tag objects are not created for tags that only occur in messages These tags are therefore not offered in the simulator tag list Therefore activate the option
299. rast to a function a subroutine does not have a return value Parameters can be passed with both types of procedure Brief overview of the use of scripts Limits 5 228 ProTool objects can be used and edited when programming scripts You can also call ProTool functions and scripts you yourself have created in scripts A script could for example compare two values with each other and supply the greater of the two as the return value In the left half of the project window you will find the Scripts object type You save the script with a symbolic name which you see in the right half of the project window ProTool supports you with color highlighting when you program scripts Tags statements objects and comments are colored appropriately E VBScript instructions are blue E Comments are green O ProTool function and script names are gray E ProTool tags are red O Screens are yellow E Archives are violet Before a script can be used it must be compiled ProTool checks the syntax and tags In the case of all objects to which functions can be attached you can also use your programmed scripts For scripts just as with functions events are also specified on whose occurrence the script is to be executed for example Value Change or Key Pressed The number and scope of the scripts depends on the operating unit you are using refer to System limits ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based
300. re shows the switch for different ways of configuration l Power O ON Example referring to a switch Pushbutton type 5 36 The pushbutton type of state button can be configured in two different ways Pushbutton This is the standard way It behaves very similarly to a button You can configure text or a graphic for pushbutton labeling as you please The labeling applies to both states in other words pressed and released An optical checkback signal of the current state is possible only with a configured 3 D display using the different border colors refer to figure oO Pushbutton with checkback signal With this form you can configure different labeling for the two states pressed and released The figure shows an example of an optical checkback signal of the two states by using different graphics Oso ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 2 12 Using buttons as direct keys Purpose You can also configure buttons as direct keys on touch operated devices in order to allow high speed key operations without delays attributable to communication Shortcuts are for example a condition for typewriter mode Constraint Direct keys cannot be configured on Panel PCs and OPs permanent keys are assigned to OPs PROFIBUS direct keys With PROFIBUS direct keys you set bits on the operating unit directly
301. re used Changing screens in recipe views On changing screens the recipe view retains its present contents If the recipe view contains unsaved values at the time the screen is changed you are prompted to save them The recipe concerned and the data record are displayed for guidance If you return to the recipe view its contents are updated automatically Tips on operation without a mouse and without a touch screen You can also use all the recipe view controls without a mouse and without a touch screen You will find the relevant key combinations in the ProTool Pro Runtime user manual and in the equipment manual of your operating unit Take the following steps to optimize recipe view operation for your operating unit e Function keys instead of buttons In ProTool deselect the button display Instead assign the corresponding functions to function keys or soft keys Select the Functions tab for the function key In the Select Object window ProTool provides all the data record editing functions under the heading Keyboard operation of screen objects e Scrolling through recipe entries For the recipe view configure two function keys or soft keys to which you assign the functions Page _Up and Page Down If you have selected the table you will then be able to use the keys at tun time to scroll forward or backward through the recipe entries a page ata time ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows ba
302. recipe in your project and on the operating unit Synchronize tags In recipe properties you can control the recipe tag properties on the Options tab With the Synchronize tags option you specify that the data of a data record which has been read from the PLC or data medium has been written to the tags or has been read from the tags you configured for the recipe Tags offline Also on the Options tab use the Tags offline option to set default case that entered values are only saved in the tags but not downloaded directly to the PLC on input The requirement here is that the Synchronize tags option is also selected If the Tags offline option is not set the values are downloaded directly to the PLC on input 2 Create the screen Create one or more screens if you want to be able to create save and transfer data records on the operating unit Create input output fields for the recipe tags They can be used to display and change the values on the operating unit 3 Assign functions Assign the functions for editing data records for example saving or transferring to function keys soft keys or buttons To do this select the Functions tab In the Object Selection window ProTool provides all the data record editing functions under the heading data record ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 193 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 12 4 Confi
303. recipe view you can set different font attributes for titles and basic text for example The fonts available depend on the actual device that has been set Which font properties are available will depend on the font selected Note Text markings such as font style bold italic etc and effects strikethrough underscore always refer completely to the selected screen object property This means for example that you can display all the titles within a screen object as bold but not the individual letters or words in a title ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 15 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 1 6 Custom configuration user interface in ProTool Custom configuration user interface 5 16 To configure display elements and controls in a user friendly manner you can create the configuration user interface in ProTool so that it satisfies your requirements Select View gt User Interface from the menu while the screen is open You can perform the following settings in the Interface dialog box e At Zoom set the zoom factor of the current screen in percent e At Field grid set the density of the grid on the current screen e At Display select whether and how you want to have the grid displayed Note You can perform the zoom functions in conjunction with CTRL and the numeric keypad too CTRL Zoom in CTRL CTRL
304. reens from projects created with earlier versions are given a standard sequence top left to bottom right Thereafter newly added elements are numbered in the order in which they are created ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 220 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 13 8 Width and order of columns screen objects Purpose Procedure So that the operator himself does not have to set the column width and order This means that you can design screen objects such as message view password list recipe view and Status Force in a more comprehensible manner for the operator You can place important items on top and optimally adjust column width to the contents For this there is an editing mode in the screen editor which activates a screen object that is makes it operable With SHIFT and double click on the desired screen object or by choosing lt Screen Object Name gt gt Edit on the shortcut menu you can activate the screen object that is then surrounded by a hatched border The zoom factor is set to 100 to ensure that the screen object is displayed in its entirety If you have set the width and order of the columns simply click on a vacant point in the screen editor The old zoom factor is reset automatically ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 221 Configuration techniques Release 12
305. reens in your project You can find virtually all screen objects graphics in a whole number of categories dealing with subjects on technology and production such as e valves motors tanks e production lines e factory buildings e 3D ISA symbols e refrigerator units and heating installations In the screen editor you can paste any object from the SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library into the current screen and edit it As well as the usual tabs which you get for all screen objects Color Attributes Functions Position Name Help text and Enable there are two more tabs for the SIMATIC HMI symbol library e Symbol Selecting the required symbol e Style Settings for color fill transparency and alignment of the screen object as well as configuration of a tag You can modify the appearance and manner in which a symbol and its background are displayed You can mirror the symbol and or rotate in steps of 90 You can give the cursor above the screen an additional lightning symbol to make the configuration of a function clear to the operator for example only when using the mouse You can configure a tag to the symbol and thus control the display of colors as a function of a limit value range not being achieved or being exceeded The preview automatically shows you how the symbol will appear in ProTool Pro RT ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration tec
306. ress on the new device is probably already being used by another bus node The MPI address can be displayed and modified if necessary by means of the S7 Settings applet on the Control Panel of the device ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 6 3 Testing projects Release 12 02 6 2 Downloading the executable project file Download options You can download the project file from the configuration computer to the operating unit as follows sa o po o o o C E Etemet Tori o e C E E Note Some USB cables with network function cannot be used for a direct connection e Direct connection USB cable serial cable e Network connection Ethernet or modem If the destination device a PC for instance and the configuration computer are located on the same network you can also download the executable project file over Ethernet by establishing a network connection to the destination device e MPI PROFIBUS DP Floppy disk download PC only In your project choose File gt Download gt Settings from the menu and select drive A as the destination directory The executable project file is then compressed and packed onto one or more disks which you unpack again on the destination device with the disk download Download mode with Windows CE systems A requirement is that the operating unit is in Download mode or goes automatically to Download mode whe
307. ript Assignment of symbolic names The names of VBScript constructs such as If Then Loop Sub and Dim cannot be used by ProTool objects as symbolic names In the symbolic names of VBScript tags local tags and procedures no special characters or language dependent characters such as a or can be used All names beginning with pt are reserved for internal ProTool objects If you cannot avoid using the names of VBScript constructs for the symbolic names you must give the names object specific prefixes These are e In the case of ProTool tags global tags the prefix Ptvar e Inthe case of ProTool functions the prefix PtFct e Inthe case of ProTool screen names the prefix PtScn e Inthe case of ProTool archive names the prefix PtArc e Inthe case of ProTool script names the prefix PtScp Example of using tags PtVar Convert Global tags In ProTool tag names global tags all characters except quotation marks are allowed If you want to use ProTool tags in a script you must always use the form PtTag Tag_Name If you insert a ProTool tag from the Select Object dialog box in the script editor it will be formatted automatically Processing multiple scripts Only one script can ever be executed at any one time in online operation If there are several scripts due to be executed they are arranged in a queue If another script is called in a script the parent script must wait until the script within it is completed
308. ritten to them at run time You can use the recipe and data record numbers names stored in the tags as a parameter for functions and scripts to save the current data record for example Note Select String tag when you use recipe and data record names and tag when you use recipe and data record numbers I Iag String variable Hase New Edit Rename Duplicate ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 3 Recipe screen Purpose You want to configure custom screen forms for entering data records for example by visually simulating your system Usage The recipe consists of screen objects for which you configure recipe tags You can distribute large recipes over several topic specific screens and display them with graphic elements for example This method is particularly recommended for data records with a relatively high number of entries In addition you have the option of linking several recipes in mutual dependence You ca configure a recipe view on a recipe screen in order to use it as a selection list for data records for example Basic procedure for creating a recipe screen 1 Define the recipe structure Assign tags to the structure of the recipe Use these tags for the input output fields in the recipe screens Define a name for the recipe You will use this name to select the
309. rk standard printer configured one as standard printer The intermediate buffer for printing Do not issue print jobs so graphics is full Up to two graphics can quickly in succession be buffered 10003 Graphics can be buffered again Ee ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 1 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 A 2 The intermediate buffer for printing lines Do not issue print jobs so in text mode e g messages is full Up quickly in succession to 1000 lines can be buffered 10005 Lines of text can be buffered again The Windows print system reports an Repeat the action if error For information on the cause refer necessary to the text printed and if available the error number Printing is not performed or it is incorrect 20010 A fault has occurred in the script line Select the specified script line called in from the specified script in the configuration Execution of the script function was Check tags whether the therefore terminated types used are permissible In this case it is advisable to check any Check Functions whether previous system messages too the number and types of parameter are correct 20011 An error has occurred in a script called in Select the scripts from the by the script specified Execution of the configuration which are called script function has therefore been in directly or indirectly via the t
310. roject language Project management With integrated operation Project management with integrated operation Project Manager Project window Objects Prompting the operator Properties of tags ProTool Configuration software Connecting to STEP 7 Lite Device family Getting Started Integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Overview Starting in integrated SIMATIC STEP 7 ProTool for graphical displays ProTool for text based displays ProTool for Windows based systems ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 3 1 TMNT Ao nm m 1 ProTool objects Using in scripts ProTool version Providing Help text Providing Help text on operating unit Providing information text R Read in alphanumeric values Read in numeric values Read in symbolic values Read in values Read out alphanumeric values Read out numeric values Read out values Realtime trend Recipe Configure Data mailbox Data record Enter data records example Example Overview Set structure Synchronization with the PLC Recipe printout Recipe screen Recipe view Screen object Recipes Application scenarios Compatibility Redo Redoing the last action Reference language Reference text Reference text for multilingual projects Report Create example Print Recipe Report operating states Reports Requirements for configuring in Asian languages Resource consumption of message S Scaling tags 5 81 Scenario 2 Manual production process example 5 209
311. rojects for the following devices TP 170A TEE e720 LeeLee la kp o x x gt x x x x gt CE EEREE EEL x ekkki Hk we A EEEE Ele x PERERA EHHE e EE EEEE EEEE Por enee e eae eee x mixta tte txts x x EE EEE EEE es 1 PERT T ER Fekke x lt a __ __ __ ES x x x x HER TT bee ebb ppp emn pde ie Del esis elapse rie kel I femme elm eff elm Fras ETRE TT TT RET ooo als Les les es x aia lle a eta EH T kkkhh e Foie BELU Ekee Note Take note of the system limits of the device when you convert projects ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 21 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 Graphics display gt Windows based system You can also create a new project for a Windows based system such as an MP 370 or Panel PC 670 by choosing the File gt Convert option from the menu from an existing project for a device having a graphics display such as an OP 37 Projects of different resolution are also mutually convertible All objects that can be mapped to the new destination device can be converted If the functionality of a given object is not supported on the destination device the object will possibly only be converted in part or not at all ProTool will tell you in the system message window if there are any objects and functions that can
312. rring a data record to the PLC This example shows you how to create a recipe The other subtasks are dealt with in the example How to configure a recipe view ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 203 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Procedure 5 204 The example recipe is to be created for a PC 670 connected to the SIMATIC S7 300 and SIMATIC S7 400 PLC through an MPI Creating a recipe P Procedure na Create a new project and save it under a name of your choice In the project window double click Recipes to create the recipe described below 3 Create four REAL tags Var_2 Var_3 Var_4 and Var_5 for the ingredients orange in liters water in liters sugar in kilograms and flavor in grams and assign the following addresses Var_2 DB 120 DBD 0 Var _3 DB 120 DBD 4 Var 4 DB 120 DBD 8 Var 5 DB 120 DBD 12 Assign the tags the illustrated entry names in the Recipe dialog box and add the entries for the recipe structure You define the structure of the recipe by means of the order of the tags Tag Entry Name Offset Length VAR_2 1_Orange 4 VAR_3 1 Water 4 VAR_4 kg_Sugar 4 Click the Properties button in the Recipe dialog box On the General tab change the name of the recipe to mixture Set the recipe number to 1 Select your PLC on the Transfer tab On the Options tab deselect the Synchronize tags check b
313. rvice Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 54 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 2 19 2 How to set the date and time on the TP 170A Procedure If the PLC system time is displayed in the output field on the TP 170A it should also be possible to set it To set the date and time configure an input field and a button for transferring the date and time from the input field to the PLC Note The procedure for configuring an input output field is the same for a Date and Time type output field S7 300 or S7 400 or a String type output field S7 200 The example applies to a connection for a S7 300 or S7 400 The differences from a S7 200 connection are pointed out The figures show the settings for a connection to a S7 200 C poea OOOO S 1 K Insert an input field and perform the following settings S7 300 or S7 400 Display Date and time S7 200 Display String Field length 17 Input field RIES General Font Color Functions Position Name Enable Display sting o Update M Continuously Decimal Places Display I Border Field Lenath 7 3D T Adjust Value No Tag gt bs jl gt m Alignment C Left Center C Center C Right Bottom conc ao ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 55 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 a Pr
314. rvice Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 151 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 14 2 Message areas for SIMATIC S5 Memory on a SIMATIC S5 The message area is defined in memory words for example FW 50 Length 2 Memory 51 Memory 50 Bit no 7 Oo 0 Message no 16 1 Memory 53 Memory 52 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 152 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 14 3 Message areas for SIMATIC S7 Data words on a SIMATIC S7 The message area is defined in a data block for example DB 70 DBW 0 Length 4 Data word 0 Data word 4 Bit no T O 7 0 Message no 64 49 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 153 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 14 4 Examples of system messages SIMATIC OP The HMI system messages of the operating unit are read out for example 13001 Not enough memory available on hard disk SIMATIC S7 Minimal The message numbers of the S7 system messages are output The operator can refer to the cause of MESSAGE 84303 07 03 98 15 16 34 SIMATIC S7 Standard In addition to the minimal display the message text of the S7 system message is output For this the operator can select the corresponding message with the help of the arrow key MESSAGE S4303 07 03 98 15 16 3
315. s occurred during transfer Note For further information about the direct transfer of data records refer to the Communication for Windows based Systems manual You create the data mailbox in your project at Area pointer in the project window The data mailbox is created with a length of 5 data words and has the following structure Word 1 Current recipe number 1 999 Word Current data record number 1 65535 Word Word Words ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 8 Compatibility of recipes Special features with recipes Please take into consideration the following notes on copying recipes via the clipboard e Windows based system gt Windows based system During copying all fields and their properties are assigned the values used in the source project e Windows based system gt graphics display It is not possible to copy the recipes of Windows based systems to projects for graphics displays e Graphics display gt Windows based system Properties not available in the source project for example storage location are given the default settings in the destination project Settings no longer available in the destination project are discarded The standard screens and data record functions of the devices having a graphics display are not converted Please note that if you are using
316. s a broad outline ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 1 4 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Introducing ProTool 1 1 1 ProTool for the whole SIMATIC HMI device family The SIMATIC HMI device family The SIMATIC HMI device family is a complete family of text displays operator panels touch panels and Windows based systems for efficient machine operation and monitoring The performance and convenience of the devices are finely tuned to suit the individual demands made of them Protool Pro LA D VON Software tor PC Based HMI SIMATIC HMI operating units The great advantage is that you configure all the devices with the same configuration software ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 1 5 Introducing ProTool Release 12 02 1 1 2 ProTool for Windows based systems Devices The ProTool Configuring Windows Based Systems documentation tells you how to configure the following devices Panels TP 170A TP 170B TP 170B Color TP 270 6 and 10 OP 170B OP 270 6 and 10 Mobile Panels Mobile Panel 170 Multi Panels MP 270B MP 270B TOUCH MP 270 MP 370 MP 370 TOUCH MP 370 15 TOUCH Panel PCs FI25 F145 PC 670 10 PC 670 12 PC 670 15 PC 670 12 TOUCH PC 670 15 TOUCH PC 870 12
317. s based systems x 6AV6594 1MA06 1ABO Release 12 02 Introducing ProTool 1 Introducing ProTool ProTool components SIMATIC ProTool consists of the ProTool CS Configuration System configuration software and a Runtime software for process visualization ProTool Pro RT for example Both systems can run on the Windows 98 SE Windows Millenium Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4 0 operating systems A separate Runtime software can also run on Windows CE devices e With ProTool CS you create your projects on a configuration computer PU or PC in Windows e With ProTool Pro RT you let your project run on the operating unit and visualize the process You also use ProTool Pro RT on your configuration computer to test and simulate the compiled project file Windows based systems SIMATIC ProTool Pro RT can be installed plug and play on the following Windows CE devices e Multi Panel such as MP 270B MP 370 e Panel such as OP 170B TP 170B TP 170A TP 270 OP 270 e Mobile Panel such as Mobile Panel 170 SIMATIC ProTool Pro RT can be run on the following Windows based PC systems e SIMATIC Panel PC such as PC 670 PC 670 TOUCH PC 870 PC 870 TOUCH e Standard PC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 1 1 Introducing ProTool Release 12 02 A typical structure ProTod cs 0000 o o oO oO Oo oO Oo ooooooo0 Fooooooo Example
318. screen assign a data record name and save the data record to the storage medium of the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 207 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Implementation options in ProTool In ProTool you configure the structure of the recipe with the associated tags 1 Since we do not want the production data to be transferred to the PLC synchronization with the PLC is not necessary We do not want to have the tags transferred to the PLC Click Properties and set the following configuration Recipes 2 Depending on the size of the recipe configure either a recipe view or create a recipe screen ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 208 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 9 4 Scenario 2 Manual production process Objective The production data have to be requested from the PLC B as a function of the work piece we want to process and shown on the display of the operating unit A for inspection If necessary you want to be able to correct the transferred production data online Process ext data medium Memory medium Display DB1DBV0 5 DB2DBvV0 95 DBSDBW0 3 DB4DBvv0 100 A reader connected say to the PLC reads out a barcode on the work piece we want to process The data record names correspond in this instance to
319. screen with the recipe view At Recipe name select the recipe called mixture Click the New button Position the cursor in the Data record name input field and enter Juice as the name Move the cursor to the input field at data record name Then enter the following values Orange 95 Water 5 Sugar 3 Flavor 250 Click the Save button This saves the data record to the specified path ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 205 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Transferring a data record to the PLC Procedure Press the To PLC button to transfer the data record from the operating unit to the PLC During transfer of the data record the operating unit sets bits in the status word of the data mailbox Confirm the transfer in the PLC program Result The values for the Juice data record are now in the memory area of the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 206 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 9 3 Scenario 1 How to enter data records Objective You want to enter production data on the operating unit A without interrupting the active process The production data are not to be transferred to the PLC B for that reason Process ext data medium Display Enter the production data in the recipe view or on the recipe
320. se 12 02 Preface Preface Purpose This document forms part of the documentation package for the ProTool CS configuration software It provides all information required for the creation and configuration of projects Notation Different font formats simplify orientation within the text Output File gt Edit History of the documentation Names of dialog boxes fields and buttons are shown in quotation marks Menu items are shown in quotation marks Successive submenus options are separated by arrows The complete route to the menu option in question is always shown This documentation describes the configuration of Windows based systems with ProTool The various issues of the documentation correspond to the following product versions Release 07 98 Release 01 99 Release 12 99 Release 07 00 Release 03 01 Configuring Windows based systems Valid for ProTool Pro CS 5 0 or higher Inclusion of MP 270 and editorial reworking of manual Software runs under Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 and higher Valid for ProTool Pro CS 5 1 or higher Extensions and inclusions of new operating units Software runs under Windows 95 98 Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4 0 and higher Valid for ProTool Pro CS 5 2 or higher Extensions new operating units and new PLC drivers Applies to ProTool Pro CS version 5 2 or higher plus Service Pack 2 Incorporation of MP 370 and SIMOTION PLC driv
321. sed systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 191 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Specifying the recipe name If you select a specific recipe at Recipe name fixed in the Recipe View dialog box on the General tab you will only be able to display and edit data records of the recipe you specify in the selection field Possible applications e You only wish a specific recipe to be edited or displayed on a particular screen e For example only the data records of one specific recipe are to be transferred for a user group Displaying and or editing data records You set the Display table setting to specify whether the configured entries of the current data record are to be displayed on the operating unit If you suppress the display you simultaneously rule out the possibility of using the recipe view to create or edit data records You use the Edit setting to specify whether you can edit the table at run time and directly enter or modify the data record name If you inhibit editing the recipe view is used only as an output field If you have selected both the Display table and Allow Edit check boxes the configured entries of the data records will be displayed on the operating unit At the same time you have write access to the values Writing recipe and data record numbers names to tags 5 192 You can configure separate tags for the recipe and data record numbers names The numbers selected on the operating unit are w
322. ser Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 129 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 13 Message procedure Message procedures in ProTool 5 130 The message procedure identified the transfer path of messages and thus also the parameters of the messages ProTool supports two message procedures e The message bit procedure This is the default message procedure in ProTool The operating unit detects the messages by setting a corresponding bit on the PLC e The ALARM_S message number procedure This is the procedure by which system fault message SFM type messages are transferred from the PLC to the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 13 1 Message bit procedure Principle With the message bit procedure the operating unit detects the arrival departure or acknowledgement of a message by setting a bit in the address area the bit being assigned by choosing System gt Area Pointers from the menu to the event alarm message area The setting resetting and acknowledging of the bit is known as a message event Active K The message bit has been set and the message is waiting to be displayed Cleared G The message bit has been reset because the cause that gave rise to the message no longer exists Acknowledge Q With alarm messages only The operator or th
323. ser executing files ProTool Pro RT must be granted access rights for the files specified or insufficient memory space specified path or close other was available applications 70010 The application could not be started Check whether the because it could not be found in the path application exists in the ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 A 3 HMI System Messages Release 12 02 70011 Could not change the system time The Check in the time that you error message appears in conjunction want to set the values for the with Area Pointer Date Time PLC year month day hour Possible causes minute second and day of an illegal time was forwarded in the the week PLC job In Windows NT The user the Windows NT user does not have executing ProTool Pro RT the user right to change the system time Must be given the right to l change the Windows NT If the value 13 is shown as the first system time parameter in the system message the Administrator User Manager second parameter identifies the byte conventions having the incorrect value 70012 An error occurred when executing the Terminate all applications function Exit Runtime with the option Exit currently running also Windows Then terminate Windows Windows and ProTool Pro RT are not terminated A possible cause is that other applications cannot be terminated 70013 The system time could not
324. sly by using a separate tag If you use a tag with PLC connection to enable and disable you can activate certain project versions for different operating units from the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 13 5 Dynamic attributes Purpose Index tag To draw the operator s attention on the operating unit to specific situations for example specified limit values have been reached or exceeded you can configure attributes for input and output elements This means that you can dynamically modify the foreground and background colors for example of an input output field at run time as a function of the value of a tag or you can enable or disable flashing for the text that is being displayed Note The background and foreground colors are automatically assigned by the system to the graphic view graphic list and graphic input fields A background color or foreground color configured in ProTool is therefore not displayed at run time You can either link the specified attributed directly to the tag of an input output field for instance or you can define a separate index tag for it You can influence several input output fields simultaneously with a separate index tag ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 217 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 13 6
325. ssfully exported 70020 Acknowledgement for activation of message recording 70021 Acknowledgement for deactivation of message recording 70022 Acknowledgement to starting the Import Password List action 70023 Acknowledgement to starting the Export Password List action 70027 Backing up the RAM file system has been started 70028 Backing up of the RAM file system has been completed successfully The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash memory Following a restart these saved files will be copied back in the RAM file system has been made the Save Files button in the Persistent Storage tab control 70030 The parameters configured for the Compare the parameters function are faulty configured for the function The connection to the new PLC was not with the parameters 70029 Backup of the RAM file system has Check the settings in the OP failed Properties dialog and save No backup copy of the RAM file system the RAM file system using established configured for the PLC and correct them as necessary 70031 The PLC configured in the function is not Compare the S7 PLC name an S7 PLC parameter configured for the The connection to the new PLC was not _ function with the parameters established configured for the PLC and correct them as necessary 80001 The archive specified is filled to the size Store the file or table by defined in percent and must be stored executing a move or copy
326. strator s password and the time after which the administrator has to log on again if there has been no operator input time out Select this check box in order to set the operating unit as the server in the OPC network in the executable project Conversely OPC clients can recognize the operating unit as the server in the OPC network This option allows you to stop the operator calling up a different program on the operating unit The operating unit is then only available to the ProTool project at run time If you have selected Lock task switching it is essential to configure a key with the function Exit Runtime in the project Otherwise you will not be able to exit ProTool Pro RT or Windows The key combination CTRL ALT DEL has no effect either ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 7 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 Display Full Screen Display Use On Screen Keyboard Display Show Tooltips Cursor control as for v 5 10 You should decide right at the start of a project how you want to display it at runtime so that you can create your screens in the correct size When you select this check box the project is displayed on the operating unit while making full use of the screen size This setting is useful for most projects With the Full Screen setting you have a somewhat larger area available for your screens and the
327. t gt SIMATIC gt ProTool gt ProTool Information System in the topic Process communication You can select the following drivers for Windows based systems SIMATIC S5 AS511 SIMATIC S5 DP SIMATIC S7 300 400 SIMATIC WinAC SIMATIC S7 200 SIMATIC 500 505 SIMATIC 500 505 DP SIMOTION OPC Client Server Allen Bradley DF1 PLC5 SLC500 Allen Bradley DH485 LG GLOFA GM MITSUBISHI FX MITSUBISHI Protocol 4 Modicon Modbus Telemecanique Uni Telway GE Fanuc SNP SNPX Omron Host Link Multilink Repercussions for tags The address of a tag depends on the PLC you are using The way in which the address of a tag with a PLC connection is displayed depends on the PLC you selected You select the available data types and data formats in the Tags dialog box at Type or Format ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 9 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 You will find an overview of the available data types and data formats that you can select for the PLC driver concerned in the Communication for Windows Based Systems user s manual ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 4 10 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 7 Area pointers What are area pointers for A defined address area on the PLC for data interchange with the operating unit is addressed by means of
328. t Language Support gt Details This is not necessary in Windows NT Note If the runtime software is running on a different computer from the configuration software in other words if the computer used for operating is not the same one that is used for configuring you may have to reload the language support on both computers Alternatively you can install Windows completely in one of these languages Note The ProTool installation CD ROM contains support for other languages not supplied as standard with Windows such as Albanian Bulgarian Romanian Turkish etc in the directory WINLANGS More detailed information is provided in the file MULLANGO INF To create projects in Asian languages you require an Asian Windows system You will find detailed information in Requirements for configuring in Asian Languages ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 240 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 15 2 Languages in ProTool User interface language and project languages ProTool makes a distinction between two language levels e The user interface language in ProTool This is the language in which the menu and dialog box text blocks are displayed when you configure in ProTool Pro CS The user interface language is selected from ProTool s Setup e The project languages These are the languages in which the blocks of text in your project appear on
329. t since the data is always linked to a STEP 7 project It therefore has to be managed and backed up using this application ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 7 3 Documenting and managing projects Release 12 02 7 3 Managing projects in stand alone operation Project Manager If you installed ProTool as a stand alone application in other words if you are not operating it under SIMATIC STEP 7 there is a user friendly project manager integrated in ProTool instead of SIMATIC Manager You can use it to manage your projects in a user friendly way Usage With Project Manager it is simple for you to e Archive projects Backup using more than one floppy disk too e Restore archived projects Restore e Open projects e Delete projects Backup and restore The Backup and Restore functions are not possible between devices of different types A backed up version of a MP 270 project can therefore only be restored on an MP 270 The Backup and Restore functions are also available for your projects on the operating units Refer to your equipment manual for further information ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 7 4 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Documenting and managing projects Call You start Project Manager by choosing File gt Project Manager from the menu When you call Project Manager for the first t
330. tag may be local or it may have a connection to the PLC If there is a connection to the PLC the value is set by the process The result of the function is written to a tag which itself can either be local or have a connection to the PLC Since an input parameter can contain letters in addition to figures for example in recipe names this has to be reported to the function This is done by selecting a string constant vaoisicweul Parameters Save_Data_Record 21x Delete Data Delete_Data Export_Data Recipe number name Import_Data Data record number name 0 Load Data Overwrite Overvwrite_With_Prompting poe es Recipe_Tag Issue status messages On Return value Save_Data_ H Diagnosis Recipe number name Orange juice Consens i v String constant lies number or recipe name a g ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 10 3 Combining multiple functions Multiple functions with one object You can also assign an event several functions The functions are then initiated one after the other You set the order in which this occurs in the Functions dialog box during configuration Functions Selected Select Screen Parameters Screen Name PIC_14 Lanquage Remove Language Key 1 Language Field VAR_Lang Events Up Down UE Multiple functions with one object Sequence You can chang
331. tc of the tags are what are referred to as the entry names The entry names are displayed as well on the operating unit Thus the tag Var_2 for example is identifiable as the tag which defines the proportion of orange in the mixture The data records contain the values for the different drink types The data records could be as follows for example orange fs e o moo js flavor E a CS ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 186 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 1 Using and configuring recipes Using recipes With regard to using recipes you will find three scenarios among other things at Examples which demonstrate the use of recipes with brief practical examples They are intended to provide you with a top level overview of the possibilities open to you as a result of using recipes e The first scenario shows a recipe configuration with which entered data are not transferred immediately to the PLC You set this configuration when for example you want to enter data on the operating unit without interrupting an active process e Inthe second scenario data are immediately transferred to the PLC This configuration can be used for example to run in a machine and correct positioning data online when doing so e The third scenario uses data record functions for automatically controlling production by means of a job list Data flow with rec
332. techniques If you want to do without Report System Error SFM type messages deselect the SFM check box Messages of this type are not transferred and do not take up memory on the operating unit Note If ALARM_S is the only message system you selected in ProTool for a project the entries for event messages and alarm messages will no longer be offered in the ProTool project window Selecting display classes When you click the Alarm_S button the SIMATIC S7 ALARM_S dialog box opens SIMATIC 7 Alarm_S x Selected PLCs Description All messages transferred Cancel 16 of 16 display classes selected Details SIMATIC S7 ALARM_S dialog box In this dialog box you can set individually for each PLC on your system the messages to be displayed on the operating unit By default all messages are sent Note By carefully targeting your selection to specific display classes you can restrict the display on the configured operating unit to very specific messages Other messages can then be displayed on another device such as a control desk The left hand column of the dialog box shows you a list of all the PLCs on your system For each PLC you can cause the operating unit to display no messages a selection of messages or all messages ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 139 Configuration techniq
333. th the SIMATIC S7 automation system Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in D 90327 Nuremberg Germany for details Telephone 49 911 895 3200 Internet http www sitrain com E Mail info sitrain com Other Sources of Assistance In case of technical queries please contact the Siemens representatives in the subsidiaries and branches responsible for your area The addresses can be found e Inthe Siemens Catalog ST 80 e In the Internet under http www siemens com automation partner e Inthe Interactive Catalog CA01 http www siemens com automation ca01 iv User Manual ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1ABO Release 12 02 Contents Contents 1 Introducing PROT OO cistccciccacctnccsaccsccceedcchdcdcticndeestivendeectvesdeectvetizetvents 1 1 Overview of the documentation eect eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaes 1 4 1 1 1 ProTool for the whole SIMATIC HMI device family ccceeeereeeed 1 5 1 1 2 ProTool for Windows based systems cccceeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeeteteeeeetneeeeee 1 6 1 1 3 ProTool for graphical displays ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseteeeeesteeeeetneeeeee 1 8 1 1 4 ProTool for text based displays eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 2 Getting started in ProloOl iiiiccccccn cients 2 1 2 1 starting Pro OOM ices secisesneeescdivves ann 2 2 Configuring Windows based systems 2
334. that do not required any input such as the display of messages There is no need to enter a password on the operating unit in order to execute functions with password level 0 e Password levels 1 to 8 Assign functions to password levels 1 to 8 according to their importance Before you execute these functions the operating unit prompts the operator to enter a password e Password level 9 The authorization to execute functions at password level 9 is granted only to the system administrator or service engineer He has access to all the functions of the operating unit You define the password of the system administrator by choosing System gt Settings from the menu The default setting is 100 The administrator s password setting cannot be changed on the operating unit at run time All other passwords are entered at run time you have to configure a password list for this You can find more information on password administration in the equipment manual for your operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 223 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Logging into and out of the operating unit e When a password protected operation is executed the operating unit automatically prompts the operator to enter an appropriate password In order to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized persons gaining access a password level greater than 0 should not remain active
335. the Clipboard 2 In the destination project replace the screen of the same name in the destination project by choosing Edit gt Insert Replace from the menu 3 Deselect the Tags object type in the Settings dialog box Tags referenced on the screen by means of input output fields for example are then not replaced Updating projects issuing from a common basic project Example All standard screens have been revised in the basic project or new ones have been added to it For example screen elements have been inserted or deleted and tag fields adapted All derived projects now have to be updated 1 In the basis project select all object types you want to have replaced in the destination project by choosing File gt Replace gt Setting from the menu If say only screens tags and archives have been modified only these object types should be selected 2 Save the basic project 3 In the destination project select the basic project by choosing File gt Replace gt Start from the menu In the Settings dialog box that then opens you then select the object types for substitution again The types already set in the destination project are offered as defaults Object substitution starts after you quit the dialog box by clicking OK ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Creating and editing projects 4 11 6 Undoing and redoing
336. the Functions tab together with the script mounted Selected Functions for E vent Change Value 1 GradCelsius Return Value out VAR_2 Fahrenheit in YAR_1 Configure an output field in a screen Assign the output field the tag Var_2 Every time tag Var_1 changes the script is executed and the result written to tag Var_2 The current value is displayed in the output field ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 239 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 15 Configuring in foreign languages This chapter shows you what you need to know in order to create a project with a user interface in a foreign language You can create a monolingual or a multilingual project In a multilingual project you can decide e Whether to make several languages available on an OP and provide the user with a key for switching between them e Whether to download only one language to a specific OP 5 15 1 System requirements for foreign languages Introduction Depending on your Windows language you can configure nearly all foreign languages without having to perform changes to you Windows configuration The exceptions are languages with special fonts such as Greek Polish Russian Slovenian Czech and Hungarian To be able to use these languages you have to enable language support under Windows 98 SE Control Panel gt Software gt Windows Setup g
337. the respective barcode IDs This means that the PLC can load the required data record from the storage medium of the operating unit The data record is shown on the display for inspection purposes Changes are transferred immediately to the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 209 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Implementation options in ProTool In ProTool you configure the structure of the recipe with the associated tags 1 Since the production data are required to be transferred to the PLC synchronization with the PLC is necessary to prevent uncontrolled mutual overwriting We want to have the tags transferred to the PLC Click Properties and set the following configuration 2 Depending on the size of the recipe configure either a recipe view or create a recipe screen ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 210 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 12 9 5 Scenario 3 Automated production process job list Objective Process You want to run production that is automated by means of a job list The production data are required to be transferred either from the data medium of the operating unit A or from an external data medium C directly to the PLC B There is no need for data to be shown on the display ext data gt medium ES ES slalx
338. the invalid invalid value or type in the parameter parameter Ifa tag is used asa parameter check its value 40010 The function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the parameters could not be converted the configuration to a common tag type 40011 The function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the parameters could not be converted the configuration to a common tag type 50000 The operating unit receives data faster than it is capable of processing Therefore no further data is received until the data currently available has been processed Data exchange then resumes 50001 Data exchange has been resumed 60000 This message is generated by the function Display system message text The text to be displayed is transferred to the function as a parameter 60010 The file could not be copied in the Restart the function or check direction defined because one of the two the paths of the source target files is currently open or the files source target path is not available Using Windows NT with It is possible that the Windows NT user NTFS The user executing has no access rights to one of the two ProTool Pro RT must be files granted access rights for the files 60011 An attempt was made to copy a file to Check the path of the itself source target file It is possible that the Windows NT user Using Windows NT with has no access rights to one of the two NTFS The u
339. the minimum and maximum values allowed for input The displayed values are determined from the limit values configured in the tag dialog box for the input field The figure shows an example of a German on screen keyboard for PCs and Panel PCs for entering alphanumeric values gt Bildschir P E3 On screen keyboard for PCs and Panel PCs Enabling the on screen keyboard 5 214 The manner in which the on screen keyboard is enabled depends on the operating unit e On touch operated devices the on screen keyboard is always displayed automatically as soon as the operator selects an input field After completing the input by means of RETURN the on screen keyboard disappears again e For all other devices you have to configure on screen keyboard display In addition you can configure a key with which the operator can enable or disable automatic display of the on screen keyboard as required This is practical for example when an external keyboard is connected to the operating unit and the on screen keyboard is therefore not required for input ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Position of the on screen keyboard on the screen The default position of the on screen keyboard is at the lower border of the screen e Panel PCs and standard PCs The on screen keyboard can be positioned minimized and maximized just like any othe
340. the operating unit You can create the project in any language available in Windows on the configuration computer The two language levels are completely independent of each other For example you can create French projects with an English ProTool or English projects with a French ProTool Multi lingual projects If you want your project to run in different languages store all language dependent objects in the desired languages in the project This applies for example to e Event messages e Alarm messages e Screens e Recipes e Text lists e Help texts e Reports You can store text for any project in 32 project languages In doing so you can select any 32 languages from all the languages supported by the operating system installed on the configuration computer When creating your configuration however note that the languages supported at run time depend on the operating unit You cannot edit system messages in ProTool They have been stored for every operating unit for a number of languages already If you are configuring a language for which no system messages are available all the system messages will appear in English Editing language The project language in which you edit text at any given time on the configuration computer is the editing language The toolbar and the status bar show the current editing language setting ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA
341. the same PLC the tag addresses may be discarded even when changing the connection type You can prevent this by taking an intermediate step for example Source OP 37 project using SIMATIC S5 L2 DP Vv Intermediate step 1 OP 37 project using SIMATIC S5 AS511 Vv Intermediate step 2 PC project using SIMATIC S5 AS511 Vv Destination project PC project using SIMATIC S5 DP Note For further information refer to the brief instructions Configuration information for upgrading Note The following applies to Windows CE devices In ProTool 2 and higher the regional options such as format of the date and time and decimal and list separators are German by default Modify this setting or replace the separators in the file as necessary if you are using archives or exported recipe data records in ProTool 5 2 or higher that you created in ProTool 5 1 The reason for this is that the operating unit can read archives and exported recipe data records correctly only if the set decimal and list separators are identical at the time of reading and writing ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 201 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 12 9 Examples and scenarios for creating and configuring a recipe 5 202 The examples How to create a recipe and How to configure a recipe view show you how to create a recipe for the mixing unit of a fruit juice system The
342. the system if the system message is displayed continuously Terminate all the programs which access the interface and reboot the computer Use another interface which is available in the system ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 30000 The value entered could not be Enter a permissible value accepted The entered value is rejected and the previous value is specified again Either the value range has been exceeded or impermissible characters were entered 2 230002 Since the current password level is Activate an adequate inadequate or the password dialog box password level using Login was closed with ESC the entry is 2 rejected and the previous value is specified again 30003 Changeover to the specified screen is Configure the screen not executed because the screen is not Check the selection function available configured The current screen remains selected 240000 Runtime is operating in Demo mode Load the license 3 There is either no Stopcopy license or it is defect 240001 Runtime is operating in Demo mode Load an adequate license gt Too many tags are configured for the powerpack installed version 240002 Runtime is operating with a time limited Restore the full authorization 3 standby authorization 3 The specified text comes from the component resources 240003 Authorizatio
343. tic when all queued alarm messages have been acknowledged but at least one of them has not yet been cleared Not until all acknowledged messages have departed is the message indicator hidden In this way it is not possible for queued alarm messages to be forgotten Message window and message line Messages are displayed in message windows or on the message line You can still operate the operating unit when messages are queued and displayed e The message line permanently resides on the operating unit and only ever contains one message the current one If a separate message window has been configured for alarm messages the message line only contains the current event message e Alarm messages and event messages are displayed in separate message windows A message window always contains all the queued messages of the particular message class The alarm message window opens automatically whenever an alarm message arrives For the event message window you have to configure a control element to help you open or close the window You can configure the display of messages on the operating unit by choosing System gt Screen Keys from the menu ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 121 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Window window b E Event messages and alarm messages are Event mess aue window displayed in separate message windows The alarm message window
344. tic components for example text and graphics are not updated by the PLC Dynamic components are linked to the PLC and visualize current values from the PLC memory Visualization may take place in the form of alphanumeric displays trends and bar graphs Dynamic components are also inputs made by the operator on the operating unit and written to the PLC memory The connection to the PLC is established by means of tags ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 2 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Screen editor Screens are created with a separate editor in ProTool The operating unit is displayed when you call the screen editor Open the screen editor by e Double click on Screens in the left half of the project window to create a new screen e Double click in the right half of the project window on an existing configured screen to open the screen for editing By choosing View gt User Interface or the buttons on the toolbar you can zoom in and zoom out of the display in steps If for example you wish to edit details you can do it much more simply by zooming in on them Note If possible you should always configure in 100 Mode since the display will correspond to the display as shown later at run time and you thus obtain a most precise preview To obtain an overview of the complete area that you can process select Complete screen area in the
345. tion in the PLC program to call another screen for example Data mailbox The data mailbox is a data area on the PLC It is used for synchronization during data record transfer from the operating unit to the PLC ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 11 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 12 Area pointers Date Time Date Time PLC Coordination Trend request Trend transfer area 1 Trend transfer area 2 LED assignment OP Acknowledgement Alarm messages Explanation The operating unit writes the date and time in this data area in accordance with a PLC job This data can be evaluated by the PLC program The operating unit reads from this data area in the set date time acquisition cycle to synchronize with the PLC The date and time must be stored in the PLC in the format S7_ DATE AND TIME The PLC can use this data area to prompt the status of the operating unit for example startup of the operating unit current operating mode and communication readiness The PLC can use this area pointer to determine which bit triggered trend is currently being displayed on the operating unit This data area is used to trigger trends As soon as the PLC program sets the bit assigned to the trend and the trend communication bit in the trend transfer area the operating unit detects the trigger and depending on the configuration reads
346. tion of a global tag on the PLC The address therefore depends on the PLC you are using The display of the address depends on the PLC you selected This section of the Tag dialog box adjusts dynamically to the programmable address areas ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 Section C If you have installed ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 you can access the STEP 7 symbol table directly in the Tag dialog box The symbol table is displayed in the Symbols dialog box when you select the With symbol check box Accessing tags by means of OPC OLE or simulator 5 72 If tags are accessed by means of OPC Visual Basic OLE Automation or the simulator which can also be used in functions as parameters or in scripts it might occur in isolated cases that changes of screen no longer work or some screen elements can no longer be displayed In such a case set the tags concerned to Read continuously or configure an additional tag with the same address ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 3 2 Array tags Definition Array tags consist of a definable number of elements in which tag values of the same type can be stored The number of elements specifies the memory addresses that are sequentially assigned in the memory Usage in ProTool You can explicitly address the contents of an element using an Index tag The use
347. tions dialog box 2 Select the Start Resize button 3 Drag the on screen keyboard by the Resize icon to the size you require 4 Select the Stop Resize button 5 To save the setting you have just performed click the Save button Note You can only use the on screen keyboard if the corresponding keyboard layout has been installed under Windows Enable the keyboard at Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Keyboard If you have not done it ProTool will resort to the international US layout Note Compound Korean characters can only be written by key combinations such as a b c is only possible on the on screen keyboard in the following operating systems Windows 2000 Windows NT Note If the operating system on a Panel PC is set in a European language data record names cannot be displayed with Asian characters ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 245 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 15 5 Reference text Principle 5 246 When you create a project for several languages you normally configure all the pieces of text in your native tongue first If you then change the editing language to enter text in a foreign language all the text fields appear blank again ProTool features a user friendly reference text function so that you have a basis for your translations In dialog boxes and in screen editors
348. to all stations that are logged in However it may be that you do not want to display all messages on a particular operating unit in order to avoid a torrent of messages for example In that case specific messages could be displayed just on a control desk for example In order to be able to control the display of messages so selectively in SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMOTION SCOUT each message can be assigned what is termed a display class In all there are 16 display classes display classes 0 to 15 Messages that are to appear on the machine might be assigned display class 1 those that are to appear on the control desk display class 2 The various operating units then only analyze those messages that belong to specific display classes Any other ALARM_S messages are immediately discarded assigned selected display class display class es Message A Message B o P Display classes determine which groups of messages are to be displayed on the operating unit ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Specifying display classes The display class to which an ALARM_S message belongs is determined when the message is configured in SIMATIC STEP 7 SIMOTION SCOUT For a precise description of the procedure please consult the information on message configuration in your SIMATIC STEP 7 or SIMOTION SCOUT documentation If you d
349. tons when copying from TP 170 to OP 170 e Character sets e Inthe case of multilingual projects only the languages available in the destination project are copied No new languages will be created If necessary create them before copying e Settings at System for example Language Assignment or Full Screen mode ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 29 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 4 11 5 Replacing a project and project parts Purpose If you would like to introduce new or updated standard components say from ProAgent of one project in your project you can do so with the ProTool s Replace function Replacing a complete project By choosing File gt Replace gt Setting from the menu you can set the object types which should be taken into account when replacing whole projects To do this select the object types you want The settings will be saved in the project if this project is used as a source project for the substitution the settings are taken input If you choose File gt Replace gt Start from the menu you can select a project that you want to replace your currently open project The source project must be of the same type as the destination project You should save the active configuration before doing so Replacement of a complete project cannot be undone Using the object name a check is made for all the o
350. u create local tags for example so that the operator can enter limit values on the operating unit ProTool recognizes the following tag types but these are not available on every PLC data type Bit System Range of Values BYTE 8 bit 0 through 255 OP 7 17 only FLOAT 32 bit Upper limit 3 402823 e 38 Lower limit 1 175495 e 38 64 bit Approx 12 valid digits BOOL true 1 false 0 STRING 1 1 to 128 bytes DATE 64 bit Date time value ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques data type Bit System Range of Values ARRAY tags This tag type combines a given number of tags of the same type to form a total which can be handled as a whole The StringChar data type is featured in addition to the STRING data type The ica data type is made available for the migration of graphic display or text based displays to Windows based systems Use the STRING data type in new projects Note If you configure tags for input and output fields you should always configure separate tags for input and output If you do not there might be contentions when tags are modified simultaneously by the operator and the PLC Online tags for S5 Bit System Online tags for S7 ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 69 Configuration techniques Release 12
351. uage Refer to the Windows documentation for more information about the error messages The archives are separated by the Reconnect the archives function Close archive and the incoming entries exceed the defined buffer size All the jobs in the buffer are deleted The incoming entries cause the defined Terminate the copy process buffer size to be exceeded This can be caused e g by several copying actions being activated at the same time All the copy jobs in the buffer are deleted All the archives are reconnected by means of the DB layer e g after executing the function Open_archive Values are then written back into the tables All the archives are separated from the DB layer and all connections terminated e g after executing the function Close_archive Values are temporarily buffered and written in the tables when the connection is re established There is no connection to the storage medium and a change can take place ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems A 6 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 80020 The max number of simultaneously activated copy actions has been exceeded Copying is not executed 80021 An attempt was made to delete an archive which is still involved with a copy action Deletion has not been executed 80022 An attempt was made to start a sequence archive which is nota sequence archive from an archive using
352. ue often presents a state more lucidly than an abstract numerical value for instance With graphics there is the added advantage of your being able to configure the symbolic output independently of any language You configure output fields for text on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by choosing the button shown You configure output fields for graphics on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by choosing the button shown Output field for date and time 5 22 Using the output field for date and time you can display the calendar dates and time specifications in the selected format The format depends on the language currently set on the operating unit It complies with international conventions The figure shows an example of one output field for the time and one for the date for English speaking countries 5 29 00 2 32 09 PM The output field for the date and time is especially useful for operating units such as the TP 170 A whose range of functions does not include the Display Date Time screen object ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Array tags You can configure array tags for input and output fields Using an index you can address a specific input or output field in this way You can use array tags configured for input and output fields for mapping a recipe structure to the screen confi
353. ues Release 12 02 5 140 When you click the Details button the Display Classes dialog box opens Display classes PLC_2 HES Selected Display Classes Display class 0 Display class 1 Cancel Display class 2 Display class 3 Display class 4 Display class 5 Display class 6 Display class 7 Display class 8 Display class 9 Display class 10 Display class 11 Display class 12 Display class 13 Display class 14 Display class 15 4 TA lt K A K Display Classes dialog box Display classes will have been defined when the PLC was being programmed in SIMATIC STEP 7 At the same time each message will have been assigned to one or other of these display classes You can now select individual display classes and define which messages will be displayed on the operating unit Note Messages of the Report System Error type are always displayed on the operating unit irrespective of the number of selected display classes when the SFM check box is enabled in the Message Settings dialog box ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 9 13 5 Incorporating ALARM_S messages Configuring in SIMATIC STEP 7 With message configuration in SIMATIC STEP 7 the stored blocks of text and attributes
354. ult appears on the operating unit You want to set the Online and Offline operating modes by means of two function keys You want the text Online Mode and Offline Modes to appear on the operating unit Configure the functions 5 168 CO posar OOOO S S Create and open the screen in which the switchover and display take place Click the function key that you want to use to enable the Online operating mode The Function Key dialog box appears Select the Functions tab At Selected Functions select the event Press Key 5 Select the Display Selectable Functions check box to open the Select Object window Select the Change Mode function in the Toggle function group Calculation Diagnosis Edit Bits Keyboard Messages Other Functions Password Print Screens Toggle Change_mode General Enable Functions Selected Functions for Event Key Pressed 0 Ee m e Description Change_mode Changes the operating mode of the unit Mode parameters 0 Online 1 Offline M Show Functions Available For Selection 7 Click the Add button The Parameters dialog box appears ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Procedure Select the Operating Mode parameter from the list and enter the value o in the input field under the list This parameter value controls the
355. unctions Functions and events are generally linked to a specific object The following objects can be linked to functions for example e Function keys soft keys and buttons e Screen objects e Screens e Tags Functions with tags are triggered only if the tag is displayed on the screen default or Read Continuously is selected on the Options tab in the Properties dialog box for the tag A function which you have configured for an internal tag without PLC connection whose value is modified by another function is not executed Functions are executed only as a result of changes of values triggered by the PLC Note Depending on the operating unit it might not be possible to configure functions for all these objects ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 159 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Global functions You can also link some functions to global object independent events for example e Changing screen e Buffer overflow e Change of password The configurable global events depend on the operating unit You will find a detailed description of all the permissible events in online Help under the keyword Configurable events ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 160 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 10 2 Function parameters Necessity Many functions can only
356. unds This is how to visualize different operating modes for example normal operation warning area and danger area Note On operating units that run Windows CE the configured differently colored scale ranges are not displayed at run time You can also configure the display to include a non return pointer At run time the non return pointer indicates the maximum reached so far by the value to be displayed You configure an analog display on the open screen in the Screen Objects toolbar by selecting the button shown The analog display is linked to a tag When the tag value is changed the pointer travel of the analog display is also changed Apart from this tag which contains the value to be displayed you can define other tags in order for example to modify dynamically the values for upper and lower pointer travel at run time In addition you can configure among other things the following attributes e Text for the measured quantity such as temperature and the unit such as C e Angle of rotation of the pointer at minimum and maximum values e Differently colored scale ranges for Normal Warning and Danger are not displayed on Windows CE devices at run time Note The analog display is purely a display element You cannot use it to enter analog values on the operating unit Use the slider control screen object for this purpose ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based syste
357. updating of trends or the execution of PLC jobs would take considerably longer ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 77 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 3 5 Address multiplexing Requirements Address multiplexing is possible only when a SIMATIC WinAC SIMATIC S7 300 SIMATIC S7 400 or SIMOTION is being used as a PLC Definition With address multiplexing the address parameters of a tag are modified as a function of the value of the multiplex tag Purpose of address multiplexing With address multiplexing you can reference a number of memory addresses in the address area of the PLC with a single tag You can read or write to the addresses without having to define a tag for every single address that is itis a very efficient method of processing data Configuring a multiplex tag define the multiplex tag by pressing the button shown in the Tag dialog box next to the address Pay attention to the following when configuring multiplex tags e The multiplex tag must not be multiplexed e The type of multiplex tag must match the type of address parameter which the multiplex tag is defining The following figure shows the result of the address multiplexing for tags Range DB v DB fiso J DBW VAR Address multiplexing with tags Note Address multiplexing is not possible with ProTool tags that are used in scripts because the tag
358. ure of an archive for messages example Structure of an archive for tags example 5 87 Structure of an archive for tags examples Styles Sub example Subroutine example Substituting a project and project pa Substituting project parts Substituting projects Switch buffer Switches Symbol Library Synchronization Synchronization with the PLC Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC example Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC on TP170A exampl System administrator System messages Languages System messages example System requirements For foreign languages T Tab order Tab order of operating uni Tag Address Change value Convert Functions ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems Simulation Project Simulation of the project with the simulator Simulation options 6 6 l 6 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Index Status Force Update Tag scaling Tags Array tags Create Decimal places Define Internal script tags Limit values Recipe Scale Linear Start value Update Tags for integrated operation Tags in scripts Technological alarms Testing projects Testing projects integrated in STEP 7 Testing projects with PLC link Testing projects without PLC link Text Export Import Static Text displays Text lists Text or graphic list Recipe Text or graphic lists Text based displays The components of a message 5 113 Time 5 1
359. uring e Create the different data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary e Define contiguous data areas where they belong The actual update time improves if you create one large area instead of several small ones e f you select too small an acquisition cycle it has an adverse degrades overall performance Set the acquisition cycle in line with the update rate of the process values Example The temperature variation of a furnace for example is considerably less dynamic than the variation in speed of an electric drive e f necessary dispense with the cyclic download of user data areas data entry cycle 0 to improve update times Instead use PLC jobs to download user data areas spontaneously e Place all message or screen tags in a data area e For the operating unit to be able reliably to detect changes on the PLC the changes must be queued during the actual acquisition cycle Options Read continuously 5 76 On the General tab you can choose at Acquisition cycle how often the value of a tag is transferred between the operating unit and the PLC and updated If you select the option Read Continuously Note Use the Read Continuously option only for tags that you want to have updated continuously Otherwise you will unnecessarily degrade the performance of your system ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configur
360. uring access to the floppy disk drive Furthermore non defined types of behavior occur when a floppy disk is not inserted or when the floppy disk is removed during operation PC Any path and drive except floppy disk drive Windows CE devices except OP 170B and TP 170B Depending on the hardware configuration of the operating unit you can configure the following storage locations in ProTool CS Storage Card PC Card Storage Card2 CF Card Flash internal flash memory Network path when a network is created on an operating unit Note When creating data records on the CF card make sure it is inserted If not the data will be stored in the RAM file system of Windows CE and are lost on power down ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Note on the flash memory Cyclic write access is not allowed for the internal flash memory since it reduces the life of the flash memory and thus the life of the operating unit 3 Set transfer synchronization You can set whether data records will be transferred with or without synchronization using the PLC You require the data mailbox communication area for transfer with synchronization ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 195 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Create the recipe vi
361. urs check and if necessary modify the size of the virtual memory Increase the size of the physical random access memory RAM ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 5 2 Static text Using static text Static text is text that is not linked to the PLC It cannot be modified at run time on the operating unit Use static text for example to label controls and output fields The relative importance of different text strings on a screen can be illustrated by means of different fonts and properties size color flashing etc Note on operating units with Windows CE Avoid tabulators in static text since they are replaced by other characters You must configure static text separately for any language available on the operating unit Al Configure static text by selecting the symbol illustrated ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 97 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 5 3 Vector graphic elements Purpose Vector graphic elements are vector graphics of simple geometrical basic shapes for example lines circles and rectangles By using graphic elements you can draw simple vector graphics directly in ProTool without having to use an external graphic editor Use vector graphics for example for displaying your system or as explanatory graphics for
362. version was Version area pointer entered in the PLC or If the user version is not correct the configuration or the wrong runtime is stopped configuration was started for the PLC user version 120000 The trend is not displayed because an Change the configuration incorrect axis to the trend or incorrect trend has been configured 120001 The trend is not displayed because an Change the configuration incorrect axis to the trend or incorrect trend has been configured 120002 The trend is not displayed because the Check whether the data area tag assigned tries to access an invalid for the tag exists in the PLC PLC address the configured address is correct or the value range for the tag is correct 130000 The action was not executed Close other applications Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130001 The action was not executed Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130002 The action was not executed Close other applications Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130003 No target data carrier is inserted The Check for example whether process is stopped access has been made to the correct data carrier the data carrier has been inserted 130004 The target data carrier is write Check whether access has protected The process is stopped been made to the correct data carrier Remove the write protection 130005 The file is write protected The pr
363. ves can provide diagnostic information when a system error occurs With its Report System Error function SIMATIC STEP 7 features a user friendly option to display this information in the form of messages These system error messages can also be displayed on an operating unit by means of the ALARM_S message procedure If the operating units you are using only have a small amount of application memory you can inhibit the transfer of Report System Error messages ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Display classes You can assign different display classes to individual messages in SIMATIC STEP 7 When configuring in ProTool you then can then choose a specific selection of display classes for an operating unit In that way you can distribute the messages selectively between different display units Priorities You can assign the messages different priorities when configuring ALARM_S messages as well Note Make sure that you assign messages that can bring about consequential errors a higher priority than the consequential errors themselves ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 135 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 13 3 Display classes for ALARM_S messages What are display classes Example 5 136 An S7 CPU always issues ALARM_S messages
364. vice Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 3 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Select screen Every configured screen has to be integrated into the control process so that it can be opened at run time on the operating unit For this there is the Select Screen function You an assign this function to an input field a function key or a button for example As parameters specify the screen name and the field in which you want the cursor to be positioned following a change of screens This means that a screen can be displayed by means of an input field or a function key or button With input fields soft keys and buttons the function can be used only locally on that screen Should you wish the function to be available globally you have to configure the function on a globally assigned function key or on a button positioned in the fixed window ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 5 4 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques 5 1 1 Screen objects in ProTool Introduction to screen objects Libraries Screens consist of individual objects There are different types of object which you can use at will when configuring a screen You can determine the number and type of the objects as well as their position and size Libraries are collections of preconfigured screen objects In the screen editor you can insert any library obje
365. well this does not affect their values Note Take note in this respect of Editing data records Text or graphic list for recipes 5 196 When you create a project a text or graphic list called Z RECIPES is automatically created The sequence in which the recipes are entered in the text or graphic list is determined by the parameter ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 Configuration techniques Tags in recipes The following configured properties of tags are not evaluated in recipes Unevaluated properties with non synchronized recipes Functions triggered by set events Data entry cycle and update Read Continuously Tag limit values Archiving String tags In string tags the hexadecimal value 00h is interpreted as an identifier for the end of the string Subsequent characters in the string are neither read nor displayed When written to the PLC and when saved to the data medium subsequent characters are padded with o Timers counters The range of values is not checked on the operating unit when data are entered in the recipe view in the case of timer and counter type tags Remedy Configure fixed limit values for the tag if you want the range of values to be checked when data are entered Date time Date Time of Day and Date and Time tags are all displayed in the same format in recipes namely DD MM YYYY HH MM
366. witch the PLC online displayed because communication with the PLC has been switched off 4 170002 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be displayed because reading in the diagnostics buffer SZL was terminated due to an error 170003 The display of an S7 diagnostics message is not possible An internal error 2 has been reported 170004 The display of an S7 diagnostics 1 message is not possible An internal error with error class 2 error number 3 has been reported 170007 Itis not possible to read in the S7 1 diagnostics buffer SZL because it was terminated with an internal error with error class 2 and error code 3 1 The optional parameter 1 at the start of the message may contain an identification for the S7 connection when several S7s are in parallel operation and are connected to diagnostics equipment 180000 A component OCX receives Install a newer component configuration data with a version identification which is not supported ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems A 14 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 180001 The system is overloaded because too Remedy many actions have been activated Increase the configured simultaneously cycle times or basic clock Not all the actions can be executed some are rejected Generate the messages slower polling Trigger the scripts and functions at greater i
367. xplicitly by means of downloading a 2 290060 Check back message that the data record memory has been successfully erased 290061 Check back message that erasing the data record memory was aborted with errors 290068 Request to confirm whether all data records in the recipe should be deleted 290069 Request to confirm whether all data records of all recipes should be deleted 290070 The data record specified is not Check the source of the data contained in the import file record number or data record name constant or tag value 300000 Process monitoring e g using PDiag or Change the CPU S7 Graph has been incorrectly configuration programmed More messages are queued than specified in the technical data of the CPU No further ALARM_S messages can be managed by the CPU and reported to operating systems 310000 An attempt is being made to print too Wait until printout of the last many protocols simultaneously active protocol has been Since only one protocol can be printed at concluded a time the print job is rejected Repeat the print job if necessary ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems A 26 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 Release 12 02 HMI System Messages 310001 An error occurred on triggering the printer The protocol is either not printed or printed with errors 320000 The movements have already been indicated by another device The movements c
368. y as other errors when the project is compiled The replacement of individual objects can be undone Further Replace is supported differently by various objects including between projects of different types thus for example you can paste objects from a graphics project in a Windows based project ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 4 31 Creating and editing projects Release 12 02 What you must bear in mind Scenario 1 Scenario 2 4 32 You cannot insert more objects with Replace than the number allowed by the quantity structure of the destination project If the destination project has a smaller range of functions than the source project it is possible that not all objects will be applied Only objects having the same name are replaced If for example you wish to replace a recipe with 50 entries in the destination project with a recipe having 500 entries the entries not contained in the destination project will be created Object attributes that have not been defined in the source project will be assigned default values in the destination project Accepting objects from other projects without breaking up the project structure and without time consuming reconfiguration Example You want to renew the contents of a picture without overwriting the contents of the tag on the screen 1 Copy the required screen for the substitution in the source project to
369. you can display a graphic for a closed valve and a graphic for an open valve ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 103 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 Object Name Description i Message Printout You use the illustrated symbol to read out the contents of the message buffer or a message archive to a report Message Printout is always the last object on a page you cannot insert any more objects after it on the page The messages are always read out in full if the page on which the message printout was configured is not sufficient follow on pages are printed automatically 3 Print Recipe You use the illustrated symbol to output the contents of data records for selected recipes in a report Vector graphics A vector graphics elements is for example a line a circle or a rectangle You will find an overview of objects for vector graphics in Vector graphic elements Layout To define the layout of your report select the report in the project window and choose Edit gt Properties from the menu You can configure cover sheets headers and footers as well as page numbers Trigger event The printed version of the report can be initiated automatically or manually at run time To print a report automatically at the end of a shift for example the Print Report function is configured for the scheduler To initiate manual printing of
370. ystem or by the operator by pressing the ACK button or the ACK key Note To enable the operator to trigger the functions configured for acknowledgement or process the ACK and Edit buttons must be configured in the message view or the ACK key must be available on the operating unit Alternatively you can select the functions Message View Acknowledge Message and Message View Process Message for buttons or keys in your project ProTool V6 0 Service Pack 2 User Manual How to configure Windows based systems 6AV6594 1MA06 1AB0 5 115 Configuration techniques Release 12 02 5 9 4 Acknowledging messages Principle An alarm message can be acknowledged either by the operator on the operating unit or by the PLC program By acknowledging an alarm message the operator confirms that he has taken note of the message Single acknowledgment and group acknowledgment When you configure messages you can set whether the operator as to acknowledge each message singly or whether the acknowledgement will apply to a group of messages The use of acknowledgement groups is practical in particular for messages having the same cause for example the message of the initial error and consequential errors Assigning acknowledgement groups In the Attributes dialog box of the message editor you can combine messages to form acknowledgement groups by assigning them the same number at Acknowledgement You can allocate the messages to one of u

SIMATIC HMI ProTool V6.0 Service Pack 2 How to

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents